EOS R5 Mark II - Camera CANON - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Mirrorless Digital Camera
Brand	Canon
Model	EOS R5 Mark II
Sensor	45MP Full-Frame CMOS
Image Processor	DIGIC X
ISO Range	100-51200 (expandable to 102400)
Autofocus	Dual Pixel CMOS AF II with 1053 points
Image Stabilization	5-axis In-Body, up to 8 stops
Video Recording	8K DCI at 30 fps, 4K at 120 fps
Viewfinder	0.5-inch OLED EVF, 5.76M dots
LCD Screen	3.2-inch Vari-angle Touchscreen, 2.1M dots
Shutter Speed	1/8000 to 30 sec, Bulb
Continuous Shooting	Up to 12 fps mechanical, 20 fps e-shutter
Dimensions (W x H x D)	138.5 x 97.5 x 88 mm
Weight	Approx. 738 g (body only)
Power Source	Rechargeable Li-ion Battery LP-E6NH
Battery Life	Approx. 320 shots (viewfinder), 490 shots (screen)
Storage	Dual SD/SDHC/SDXC UHS-II slots
Connectivity	USB-C, HDMI micro, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth
Weather Sealing	Yes, dust and moisture resistant
Maintenance	Use a blower for sensor dust; clean exterior with soft dry cloth.
Safety	Do not expose to moisture; use only genuine Canon accessories.
Spare Parts	Available through Canon authorized service centers.
Repairability	Designed for repairability; refer to service manual.
General Information	Launch date: 2024, Country: Japan

Frequently Asked Questions - EOS R5 Mark II CANON

What type of memory card should I use?

For optimal performance, use SD UHS-II cards for high-speed continuous shooting and video recording. Standard SD cards may limit burst rate and video quality.

How do I record 8K video?

Set the mode dial to Movie, then in the menu select 8K DCI or 8K UHD. Ensure you use a high-speed card (UHS-II or CFexpress via adapter) and sufficient battery.

How to update firmware?

Download the latest firmware from the Canon website to an SD card. Insert the card, go to Menu > Firmware Update, and follow on-screen instructions. Do not turn off during update.

What is the battery life?

With the LP-E6NH battery, you can expect approximately 320 shots using the viewfinder and 490 shots using the rear screen. Power-saving modes extend battery life.

Can I use EF lenses?

Yes, you can use EF and EF-S lenses with the Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. Autofocus and image stabilization may vary. The adapter maintains full communication.

How to clean the sensor?

Use the built-in sensor cleaning function via the menu. For stubborn dust, use a blower or a sensor cleaning kit. Avoid touching the sensor with anything.

Is the camera weather-sealed?

Yes, the EOS R5 Mark II features dust and moisture resistance with seals around buttons and compartments. However, it is not waterproof; avoid prolonged exposure to rain or splash.

How to connect to smartphone?

Install the Canon Camera Connect app. Enable Wi-Fi or Bluetooth on the camera, pair with your phone, and follow app instructions for remote control and file transfer.

What is the maximum burst rate?

In One-Shot AF mode, you can achieve up to 12 fps with mechanical shutter and 20 fps with electronic shutter. Use a fast card and fully charged battery.

How to set custom picture styles?

Go to Menu > Picture Style, select a base style, then adjust parameters like Sharpness, Contrast, and Color Tone. You can register up to three custom styles.

USER MANUAL EOS R5 Mark II CANON

Advanced User Guide

E

Introduction.... 10

Package Contents. 11

Supplemental Information.... 13

Compatible Accessories.... 14

Instruction Manuals. 15

Quick Start Guide.... 16

About This Guide. 20

Operation of Battery Packs and Power Accessories. 22

Compatible Cards.... 24

Safety Instructions.... 25

Handling Precautions.... 28

Part Names.... 31

Software/Apps. 43

Preparation and Basic Operations. 48

Charging the Battery.... 49

Inserting/Removing Batteries. 52

Inserting/Removing Cards. 55

Using the Screen. 61

Turning on the Power.... 63

Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses. 66

Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses. 70

Multi-Function Shoe. 74

Using the Viewfinder.... 76

Using Eye Control. 80

Basic Operations.... 97

Menu Operations and Settings.... 114

Quick Control. 120

Touch-Screen Operation.... 126

Shooting Mode. 128

A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto). 129

A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto). 133

BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures. 149

Shooting and Recording.... 153

Still Photo Shooting. 154

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting. 157

Image Quality. 162

Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio. 169

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB).... 173

ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos.... 175

Anti-Flicker Shooting.... 184

High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting. 186

Shooting with Speedlites.... 192

Flash Function Settings.... 197

Picture Style Selection.... 213

Picture Style Customization.... 217

Picture Style Registration.... 221

HDR Shooting (PQ).... 224

Color Space.... 225

Clarity. 226

Auto Lighting Optimizer.... 227

Highlight Tone Priority. 228

White Balance.... 229

Custom White Balance.... 234

White Balance Correction.... 246

Lens Aberration Correction. 250

Long Exposure Noise Reduction. 258

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction. 259

Dust Delete Data Acquisition. 260

Multiple Exposures.... 264

Focus Bracketing.... 273

Pre-Continuous Shooting.... 279

Interval Timer Shooting.... 281

Silent Shutter Function.... 285

Shutter Mode. 286

Enabling Shutter Release Without a Card. 288

Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). 289

Customizing Quick Controls. 292

Shooting with the Touch Shutter.... 295

Image Review.... 297

High-Speed Display.... 300

Metering Timer.... 301

HDR/C. Log View Assist. 302

Display Simulation.... 306

Optical Viewfinder Simulation.... 308

Blackout-Free Display. 309

Shooting Information Display. 310

Reverse Display.... 323

Display Frame Rate.... 324

Viewfinder Display Format. 326

Auto Power Off Temperature. 327

Metering Mode Selection. 329

AE for Priority Subjects During AF. 332

Manual Exposure Compensation. 333

Exposure Lock (AE Lock). 335

General Still Photo Shooting.... 337

Movie Recording.... 340

Tab Menus: Movie Recording. 342

Movie Recording.... 347

Movie Recording Size.... 363

High Frame Rate. 374

Main Recording Format.... 375

Movie Cropping.... 380

Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies). 381

Sound Recording. 384

Audio Format. 387

Audio Settings. 388

Audio Status. 395

Custom Pictures. 396

HDR Movie Mode. 414

Time-Lapse Movies. 419

Movie Self-Timer 433

Tally Lamp. 434

Pre-Recording Setting. 435

Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). 438

Movie Auto Level 441

False Color Settings. 442

Zebra Settings. 444

Shooting Information Display. 446

Quick Control Screen. 451

Standby: Low Resolution. 452

Canon Log HDMI Output Range. 453

Metadata. 454

Time Code. 459

Other Menu Functions. 467

General Movie Recording Precautions. 475

AF/Drive. 480

Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos). 481

Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording). 485

AF Operation. 488

Movie Servo AF 494

Selecting the AF Area. 498

Manual Focus. 528

Registering People to Prioritize. 535

Servo AF Characteristics. 550

Customizing AF Functions. 557

Focus Preset. 576

Selecting the Drive Mode.... 577

Using the Self-Timer.... 581

Remote Control Shooting. 584

Playback. 586

Tab Menus: Playback....588

Image Playback. 590

Magnified Image Display.... 595

Index Display (Multiple-Image Display).... 600

Voice Memo Recording and Playback. 603

Movie Playback.... 609

4K/8K Movie Frame Grab. 613

Playback on a TV Set. 616

Protecting Images.... 618

Erasing Images.... 622

Rotating Still Photos. 629

Changing Movie Orientation Information.... 631

Rating Images. 633

Copying Still Photos. 640

Print Ordering (DPOF).... 647

RAW Image Processing. 652

In-Camera Upscaling. 661

Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images. 666

Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images. 668

Converting HEIF to JPEG. 671

Slide Show.... 676

VR Preview.... 679

Setting Image Search Conditions.... 681

Resuming from Previous Playback. 684

Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection. 685

Customizing Playback Information Display.... 691

Displaying the Highlight Alert. 695

AF Point Display.... 696

Playback Grid. 697

Communication Functions. 700

Tab Menus: Communication Functions.... 702

Available Network Features. 704

Preparing to Use Communication Functions. 706

Network-Specific Preparation. 708

Transferring Images to an FTP Server.... 711

Connecting to EOS Utility.... 751

Uploading Images to image.canon. 764

Syncing Time Between Cameras.... 771

Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet. 778

Live Streaming.... 809

Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control. 816

Using Camera Control API (CCAPI).... 821

GPS Device Settings.... 831

Linked Shooting.... 837

Basic Communication Settings.... 847

Checking and Editing Network Settings. 891

Airplane Mode.... 917

Bluetooth Settings.... 918

Renaming the Camera. 919

Reference....920

Error Details. 921

Responding to Error Messages.... 922

Troubleshooting Guide. 935

Wireless Communication Precautions. 936

Security 938

Checking Network Settings.... 939

Wireless Communication Status. 940

Checking the MAC Address. 942

App Selection for USB Connections.... 943

Save/Load Communication Settings on Card. 944

Resetting Communication Settings. 948

Set-up. 949

Tab Menus: Set-up. 951

Selecting Cards for Recording/Playback. 955

Folder Settings. 963

Still Photo File Numbering. 967

Movie Clip Numbering.... 972

File Naming. 975

Card Formatting. 981

Auto Rotate. 984

Adding Orientation Information to Movies. 986

Date/Time/Zone. 987

Language.... 991

System Frequency. 992

Help. 993

Beeps. 996

Volume. 997

Audio Monitor 998

Screen Brightness.... 1004

Viewfinder Brightness.... 1005

Screen and Viewfinder Color Tone. 1006

Fine-Tuning Viewfinder Color Tone.... 1007

Screen and Viewfinder Display.... 1008

UI Magnification.... 1009

HDMI Resolution.... 1010

Cooling Fan Settings.... 1011

Shutter at Shutdown. 1014

Sensor Cleaning.... 1015

Power Saving. 1019

Resetting the Camera.... 1020

Custom Shooting Mode (C1-C3). 1021

Save/Load Camera Settings on Card.... 1024

Battery Information.... 1027

Copyright Information.... 1034

Other Information. 1037

Control Customization.... 1038

Tab Menus: Control Customization. 1039

Control Customization Details. 1042

Custom Functions/My Menu. 1073

Tab Menus: Custom Functions. 1074

Custom Function Setting Items. 1076

Tab Menus: My Menu. 1091

Registering My Menu.... 1092

Reference.... 1098

Importing Images to a Computer. 1099

Importing Images to a Smartphone. 1103

Using a USB Power Adapter to Charge/Power the Camera. 1106

Using a Battery Grip. 1109

Using a Cooling Fan. 1122

Troubleshooting Guide.... 1136

Error Codes.... 1155

Information Display.... 1156

Specifications. 1175

Trademarks and Licensing. 1225

Before starting to shoot, be sure to read the following

To avoid shooting problems and accidents, first read the Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions. Also read this Advanced User Guide carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.

Take some test shots, and understand about product liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and images cannot be recorded or transferred to a computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

Copyright laws in some countries prohibit the unauthorized use of images recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment.

Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.

Connecting other devices

Use the included interface cable or a Canon cable when connecting the camera to a computer or other device. When connecting an interface cable, also use the included cable protector (C)

• Package Contents • Supplemental Information
• Compatible Accessories
• Instruction Manuals
• Quick Start Guide
• About This Guide • Operation of Battery Packs and Power Accessories
• Compatible Cards
• Safety Instructions
• Handling Precautions
• Part Names
• Software/Apps

Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

Camera

(with body cap (Camera Cover R-F-5) and shoe cover ER-SC3)

Battery Pack LP-E6P

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger LC-E6/LC-E6E*

Strap

Interface Cable

Cable Protector

* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a power cord.)

The camera does not come with a memory card or HDMI cable. If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included. Be careful not to lose any of these items. No software CD-ROM is included. Software can be downloaded from the Canon website. For details on compatible interface cables, visit the Canon website.

Caution

• The transmission rate when the included interface cable is used is equivalent to SuperSpeed USB (USB 5Gbps).
• When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon website. Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold separately, and when a lens kit is purchased, some accessories included with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.

Refer to the following website for information on lenses compatible with camera features, and for supplemental information about the camera.

https://cam.start.canon/H001/

Check the following website for details on compatible accessories.

https://cam.start.canon/H002/

- Instruction Manual (included with the camera)

Be sure to read before use.

- Advanced User Guide

Complete instructions are provided in this Advanced User Guide.

For the latest Advanced User Guide, refer to the following website.

https://cam.start.canon/C017/

Lens Instruction Manuals

View or download from the following website.

https://cam.start.canon/

For software instruction manuals, see Software Instruction Manuals.

Note

- Select [Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera screen.

1. Insert the battery (2)

Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using ( )

2. Insert the cards (☐)

- You can insert two cards.

3. Attach the lens (☐).

- Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera to attach the lens.

4. Set the focus mode to AF (☐)

• Set the lens's focus mode switch to AF.
• For lenses without a focus mode switch, set [AF focus mode] to [AF].

5. Set the power switch to (☐)

6. Flip out the screen (c)

• When the language setting screen is displayed, see Language.
• When the date/time/zone setting screen is displayed, see Date/Time/Zone. After [Welcome] appears on the screen, follow the on-screen instructions to connect the camera to your smartphone (✗)

7. Set the shooting mode to [A].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [].

8. Focus on the subject ( ).

A tracking frame [] appears over any face detected. - Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject.

9. Take the picture (☑).

- Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

10. Review the picture.

• The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen. To display the image again, press the < > button ( ).

Icons in This Guide

Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos

Icons in This Guide

< >	Indicates the Main dial.
< >	Indicates Quick control dial 1.
< >	Indicates Quick control dial 2.
< *	Indicates the Multi-controller.
< >	Indicates the lens control ring.
< >1	Indicates the Set button.
*	Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation for the button you pressed, as timed after you release the button.

In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera's buttons and displayed on the screen are also used in this guide when discussing relevant operations and functionality.

☆	☆ to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] mode.
	Links to pages with related topics.
	Warning to prevent shooting problems.
	Supplemental information.
	Tips or advice for better shooting.
?	Troubleshooting advice.

Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions and Sample Photos

Before following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to < >ON and the Multi-function lock feature is off (√) It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to their defaults. ● Illustrations in this guide show the camera with the RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM lens attached as an example. Sample photos in this guide are only for illustration. In references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount adapter is used.

○: Fully functional △: Partially functional ×: Not compatible

• With one power source in the battery grip, or without a battery grip

	Without a Battery Grip	Battery Grip BG-R20	Cooling Fan CF-R20EP	Battery Grip BG-R20EP	Battery Grip BG-R10
Battery Pack LP-E6P	○○○○				Δ*2*3
Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3*4	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3
Battery Pack LP-E6*1	×××××
DC Coupler DR-E6P	○○○○				Δ*2*3

With two power sources in the battery grip

Power Source 1 Power Source 2		Battery Grip BG-R20	Cooling Fan CF-R20EP	Battery Grip BG-R20EP	Battery Grip BG-R10
Battery Pack LP-E6P	Battery Pack LP-E6P	○○○			Δ*2*3
	Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3*4	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3
	Battery Pack LP-E6 4	××××
Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N	Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3*4	Δ*2*3	Δ*2*3
	Battery Pack LP-E6 4	××××
DC Coupler DR-E6P	-○○○				Δ*2*3

* 1: Cannot be used as a power source.

* 2: Network connectivity (Wi-Fi/wired LAN) not available.

* 3: Reduces continuous shooting speed and prevents selection of 8K DCI/8K UHD/RAW/SRAW movie recording size, Fine image quality, and 239.76/200.00/119.88/100.00/59.94/50.00 fps frame rates.

HDMI RAW output, still photo shooting during movie recording, High Frame Rate movies, and pre-continuous shooting are not available.

* 4: Cooling fan cannot be used.

Caution

- DC Coupler DR-E6 and Wireless File Transmitter WFT-R10 cannot be used.

Note

With Battery Pack LP-E6NH/LP-E6N loaded or Battery Grip BG-R10 attached, a message about restricted operation is displayed on startup and when unavailable functions are selected. For optimal camera performance, use Battery Pack LP-E6P and Battery Grip BG-R20/BG-R20EP.

The following cards can be used with the camera. If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format it with this camera (i)

CFexpress cards

* Type-B compatible

SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

* UHS-II and UHS-I cards compatible

Caution

- You cannot use CFexpress cards with a capacity larger than 2TB.

Cards That Can Record Movies

When recording movies, use a CFexpress card that supports VPG400 or a card with ample performance (fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording quality (

The VPG-400 Logo is a Certification Mark of CompactFlash Association, used under license.

In this manual, “CFexpress card” refers specifically to CFexpress cards, “SD card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards collectively, and “card” refers to all memory cards in general.

* A card is not included. Please purchase it separately.

Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.

Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the product or others.

WARNING:

Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.

• Keep the product out of the reach of young children.
• Keep batteries out of the reach of children.

A strap wrapped around a person's neck may result in strangulation.

The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.

The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.

PRODUCT CONTAINS BUTTON/COIN CELL BATTERY

Button/coin cell batteries are hazardous and must be kept out of reach of children at all times, whether new or used.

These batteries can cause severe or fatal injuries in 2 hours or less if swallowed or placed inside any part of the body.

If it is suspected a button/coin cell battery has been swallowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek medical attention immediately.

• Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual for use with the product.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product.
• Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.
• Do not touch any exposed internal parts.
• Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence of smoke or a strange smell.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the product.
• Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product. Do not use the product where flammable gases may be present.

This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.

- Do not leave a lens or a camera/camcorder with a lens attached, exposed without the lens cap attached.

The lens may concentrate the light and cause fire.

- Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.

This may cause electric shock.

- Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or provided battery packs.

• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.
• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.
• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.
• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other means.

This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.

If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing, flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.

- Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.

• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth.
• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.
• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.
• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.
• Do not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the power cord.
• Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use when the product is still warm in temperature.
• Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.
• Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.
• Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5 - 40 °C (41 - 104 °F).

This may cause electric shock, explosion or fire.

- Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended periods of time during use.

This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.

- Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden.

Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.

- Do not leave batteries near pets.

Pets biting a battery could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.

CAUTION:

Follow the cautions below. Otherwise physical injury or property damage may result.

- Do not fire the flash near the eyes.

It may hurt the eyes.

- Do not look at the screen or through the viewfinder for prolonged periods of time.

This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.

- Flash emits high temperatures when fired. Keep fingers, any other part of your body, and objects away from the flash unit while taking pictures.

This may cause burns or malfunction of the flash.

- Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.

The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.

- Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong impacts.

- Do not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.

This may cause injury or damage to the product.

- Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.

Do not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.

This may cause injury or may result in an accident.

Do not touch any parts inside the product.

This may cause injury.

- If any abnormal skin reaction or irritation occurs during or following the use of this product, refrain from further use and get medical advice/attention.

- Do not touch the screen storage compartment (A), because its temperature can increase by repeated continuous shooting for extended time or movie recording. This may cause burns.

- The camera and memory cards may become hotter when [Auto pwr off temp.] is set to [High].

• We recommend using a tripod or the like to avoid handheld shooting, which may cause problems such as low-temperature contact burns.
• Do not touch CFexpress cards immediately after shooting. Cards may be hot, which may cause burns. Wait until the card has cooled down before removing it.

Camera care

This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. To maximize the camera's dust- and drip-resistance, keep the terminal cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly closed. Also attach the shoe cover to the multi-function shoe. This camera is designed to be dust- and drip-resistant, in order to help prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, or salt to get on the camera. - If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth. - Using the camera in dusty or dirty locations may lead to damage. - Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction. - If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly consult the nearest Canon Service Center. - Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera malfunction or destroy image data. - Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction. The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself. - Do not block shutter curtain operation with your finger or other objects. Doing so may cause a malfunction. - Only use a commercially available blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, or other parts. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. - Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera malfunction. - If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room, condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag. - If condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the camera or remove the lens, card, or battery. Turn the camera off and wait until the moisture has fully evaporated before resuming use. Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the ambient temperature. - If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is still working.

• Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
• If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly. The camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.
• If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting may occur.
• When shooting with backlighting, keep the sun sufficiently away from the angle of view. Always keep intense light sources such as the sun, lasers, and other intense artificial light sources out of the image area and not near it. Concentrated intense light may cause smoke or damage the image sensor or other internal components.
• Attach the lens cap to prevent direct sunlight and other light from entering the lens when you are not shooting.

Screen and viewfinder, LCD panel

The following does not affect images captured by the camera.

Although the screen and viewfinder are manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded. - If the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days. The screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

• Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force, physical shock, or vibration.
• Keep card contacts free of dust and foreign material. Do not touch card contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not affix any stickers, etc. on the card.
• Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone to having static electricity. Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
• Store the card in a case. Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
• Cards may become hot after long sessions of repeated continuous shooting or still photo shooting/movie recording. This is not a malfunction.

Lens

After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts (1).

Smudges on the image sensor

Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera's internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If smudges are visible on images, have the sensor cleaned by a nearest Canon Service Center.

Battery

Tips for using the battery and charger

• Store in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location.
• When storing the battery for extended periods, charge it about once a year. When charging the battery, aim to charge it to approx. 50% instead of fully charging it ( At room temperature (23°C/73°F), it takes approx. 60 min. to charge a depleted battery to about approx. 50%. Battery charging time varies greatly depending on ambient temperature.
• If the battery is not used for an extended period, the trace amount of current that continues to flow inside the battery when it is removed from the camera may eventually lead to over-discharge and prevent further use, even after charging.

Attaching the Strap Using the Cable Protector

(1) < > Mode button (2) Movie shooting button (3) Strap mount (4) < > Main dial (5) Shutter button (6) < / > Multi-function/FTP server image transfer button (7) Self-timer lamp/AF-assist beam (8) Grip (battery compartment) (9) DC coupler cord hole (10) Depth-of-field preview button (11) Contacts (12) Lens mount (13) Shoe cover (14) Flash sync contacts (15) Multi-function shoe (16) RF lens mount index (17) < > Focal plane mark (18) Strap mount (19) Tally lamp (20) Shutter curtain/Image sensor (21) Lens release button (22) Lens lock pin (23) Remote control terminal (24) Body cap

(1) LCD panel (2) Eyecup (3) Speaker (4) Microphone (5) < / Still photo shooting/movie recording switch (6) Terminal cover (7) <> External microphone IN terminal (8) <> Digital terminal (9) Exhaust vent (10) < > Headphone terminal (11) < > HDMOUT terminal (12) < ♣> Sync terminal (13) < / > CD panel info switching/illumination/cropping button (14) Power/multi-function lock switch (15) < > Quick control dial 2 (16) < > A E lock button (17) < > A F point selection button (18) < AF-ON > AF start button (19) < > Multi-controller (can also be pressed straight in) (20) < > Quick control dial 1 (21) <> Set button (22) < > Erase button (23) < ▶>Playback button (24) <> MENU button (25) < / > Rating/voice memo button

(1) Viewfinder eyepiece (2) Screen (3) Accessory positioning hole (4) Intake vent (5) Tripod socket (6) Serial number (body number) (7) Accessory positioning hole (8) Access lamp (9) Dioptric adjustment knob (10) <Q> Magnify/reduce button (11) <> Info button (12) <> Quick Control button (13) Card slot cover (14) Battery compartment cover lock (15) Battery compartment cover (16) Card slot 1 (17) Card slot 2 (18) Card eject button

LCD panel information display

Information displayed varies depending on camera status. For icon details, see Information Display.

Viewfinder information display

Information displayed varies depending on camera status.

Battery Charger LC-E6

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6P/LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 (☑).

(1) Battery slots (2) Charge lamp (3) Power plug

Battery Charger LC-E6E

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6P/LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6 (☑).

(1) Charge lamp (2) Battery pack slot (3) Power cord (4) Power cord socket

Pass the end of the strap through the strap mount from the bottom, then pass it through the strap buckle as shown. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

When connecting cables (an interface cable or HDMI cable), use the included cable protector. Using the cable protector helps prevent accidental disconnection and terminal damage.

• When connecting the camera to a computer, use a Canon cable (included or sold separately).
• When connecting the camera to a television or other display device, use a commercially available HDMI cable.

Preparation

1. Prepare the cable protector.

The cable protector consists of the protector (1) and a clamp (2).

2. Attach the protector to the camera.

Cable insertion/connection

Insert the cables in the clamp, attach the clamp to the protector, then connect the cables to the camera.

With both a Canon interface cable and an HDMI cable

1. Pass each cable through the clamp.

(3) Canon interface cable (4) HDMI cable

2. Attach the clamp to the protector.

3. Connect each cable to the camera.

With only a Canon interface cable or HDMI cable

Pass the cable through the clamp (2) as shown, then attach the clamp to the protector.

Caution

- Using the camera when an interface cable or HDMI cable is connected without the cable protector may damage the camera terminal. Make sure each cable is securely connected to the camera terminal.

Software/App Overview

Installing Computer Software

Installing Smartphone Apps

Software Instruction Manuals

Software/App Overview

Computer software

EOS Utility

Enables you to transfer captured images from the camera to a connected computer, set various camera settings from the computer, and shoot remotely from the computer.

Digital Photo Professional

Software recommended for users who shoot RAW images. Enables image viewing, editing, printing, and more.

- Neural network Image Processing Tool

For RAW image processing with superior image quality, applying deep learning. Requires a paid subscription.

- Neural network Upscaling Tool

For JPEG/TIFF upscaling, applying deep learning. Requires a paid subscription.

Picture Style Editor

Enables you to edit existing Picture Styles or create and save original Picture Style files.

Cinema RAW Development

For RAW movie processing, playback, and exporting.

Canon XF Utility

For transferring movie files to a computer, as well as playback and still photo extraction.

Canon RAW Plugin for Avid Media Access

For importing RAW movies into Avid Media Composer.

Canon RAW Plugin for Final Cut Pro

For importing RAW movies into Apple Final Cut Pro.

Canon Plugin for ProRes RAW

For importing RAW movies recorded with Atomos recorders in ProRes RAW format into Apple Final Cut Pro.

Smartphone apps

Camera Connect

Enables you to transfer captured images from the camera to a smartphone over a wired or wireless connection, set various camera settings from the smartphone, and shoot remotely from the smartphone.

Digital Photo Professional Express

App for RAW image processing and image editing on a smartphone or tablet. Requires a paid subscription.

Content Transfer Professional

Enables FTP transfer and other operations for captured images or images on a smartphone. Requires a paid subscription.

Always install the latest version of the software. In this case, previous versions are overwritten.

Caution

• Do not install software while the camera is connected to the computer. The software will not be installed correctly.
• Installation is not possible without an internet connection.
• Older versions of the software do not support RAW image processing or correct display for images from this camera.

1. Download the software.

- Connect to the internet from a computer and access the following Canon website. https://cam.start.canon/

Depending on the software, you may need to enter the camera's serial number. The serial number is on the bottom of the camera.

2. Extract the installer on the computer.

For Windows

- Click the displayed installer file to start the installer.

For macOS

Double-click the dmg file to open the installation window. Double-click the icon in this window to start the installer.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

● Always install the latest version. - Apps can be installed from Google Play or App Store. - You can also access Google Play and App Store from the following Canon website. https://cam.start.canon/

Check the following website for software instruction manuals.

- https://cam.start.canon/

This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.

• Charging the Battery
• Inserting/Removing Batteries
• Inserting/Removing Cards
• Using the Screen
• Turning on the Power
• Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses
• Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses
• Multi-Function Shoe • Using the Viewfinder • Using Eye Control
• Basic Operations
• Menu Operations and Settings
• Quick Control
• Touch-Screen Operation
• Detach the protective cover provided with the battery.

1. Fully insert the battery into the charger.

Do the opposite to remove the battery.

3. Charge the battery.

LC-E6

- Flip out the charger prongs as shown and plug the charger into a power outlet.

LC-E6E

• Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into a power outlet. Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp blinks in orange.

Charge Level	Charge Lamp
	Color Display
0–49%	per s@range	Blinks once per second
50–74% Blinks twice
75% or higher Blinks three times per second
Fully charged Green Turned on

• Charging a depleted battery takes approx. 3 hr. at room temperature (23°C/73°F). The time required to charge the battery will vary greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery's remaining capacity. For safety, charging in low temperatures (5–10°C/41–50°F) takes longer (up to approx. 4 hr.). Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.

Charge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. After charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet. You can attach the protective cover in a different orientation to indicate whether the battery is charged or not.

If the battery is charged, attach the provided protective cover so that the battery-shaped hole is aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is exhausted, attach the protective cover in the opposite orientation.

When not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery performance.

The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter for the respective country or region. To avoid damage, do not connect to portable voltage transformers.

If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.

Check the battery's recharge performance and purchase a new battery.

Caution

• After disconnecting the charger's power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 10 sec.
• If the battery's remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not be charged. The provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6P/LP-E6NH/LP-E6N/LP-E6.

Insertion

Removal

Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E6P into the camera.

Insertion

1. Slide the battery compartment cover lock and open the cover.

1. Insert the battery.

• Insert the end with the electrical contacts.
• Insert the battery until it locks in place. For details on compatible battery packs, see Operation of Battery Packs and Power Accessories.

3. Close the cover.

- Press the cover until it snaps shut.

1. Open the cover and remove the battery.

• Press the battery lock lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery.
• To prevent short-circuits, always attach the included protective cover to the battery.

Insertion

Formatting Cards

Removal

This camera accepts two cards. Recording is possible as long as there is at least one card in the camera.

With two cards inserted, you can select one card to record to, or you can record the same image to both cards at once.

Caution

Make sure the SD card's write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable writing and erasing.

Insertion

1. Slide the cover to open it.

Pull the card slot cover toward you to open it.

2. Insert the card.

Card 1 (CFexpress card)

Card 2 (SD card)

The card in the rear card slot is [n(CFexpress card), and the one in front of it is [p(SD card). - CFexpress card: With the card label facing you, insert the open side of the card (2) into the card slot. Inserting cards the wrong way may damage the camera. The gray card-eject button pops out. SD card: With the card label facing you, insert the card into the card slot until it clicks into place.

3. Close the cover.

- Close the cover and slide it as shown until it clicks shut.

4. Set the power switch to   natural_image Scenic view of a large waterfall with a rainbow arching over the water, captured in a photo editing interface (no readable text or symbols on the image itself)  text_image P 3..2..1..8..1..2+3 AUTO AF[1] SERVO L (3) (4) (5) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q [9999] (3) Card selection icon (4) Card 1 (CFexpress card) (5) Card 2 (SD card) \- Icons representing loaded cards are shown on the shooting screen (accessed by pressing the < > button and on the Quick Control screen) The camera will record to cards shown with a card selection icon [◀] If a card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera (☐) 1. Open the cover.  text_image Diagram of a camera with labeled parts and directional arrows indicating motion or movement directions - Set the power switch to < and make sure the access lamp (6) is off. Pull the card slot cover toward you to open it. If [Saving...] is displayed on the screen, close the cover. 2. Remove the card.  natural_image Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with blue arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols) CFexpress card: Press the card eject button (7) to eject the card. SD card: Gently press the card in, then release it to eject it. Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. Caution Do not remove cards immediately after a red [icon] is displayed as you are shooting. Cards may be hot, due to high internal camera temperature. Set the power switch to and stop shooting for a while before removing cards. Removing hot cards immediately after shooting may cause you to drop and damage them. Be careful when removing cards.  Note - The number of shots available varies depending on remaining card capacity and settings such as image quality and ISO speed. Setting [播放: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card (播放)  Caution \- When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. To avoid corrupting image data or damaging cards or the camera, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. - Removing the card. - Removing the battery. - Shaking or striking the camera. - Unplugging or plugging in a power cord (when using optional household power outlet accessories). - If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start from 0001 (☑). - If a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card. If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera (☐). The card may then return to normal. - Do not touch the card's contacts with your fingers or metal objects. Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts, contact failure may result. - Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.) - Use of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not recommended. When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards. You can change the direction and angle of the screen. 1. Flip out the screen.  natural_image Diagram showing a device with a blue arrow indicating rotation or movement, no text or symbols present 2. Rotate the screen.  text_image 180° 90° 175° - When the screen is out, you can tilt it up or down or rotate it to face the subject. - Indicated angles are only approximate. 3. Face it toward you.  text_image 液晶玻璃② Normally, use the camera with the screen facing you.  Caution - Avoid forcing the screen into position as you rotate it, which puts undue pressure on the hinge. - When a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of the flipped-out screen will be limited.  Note - Keep the screen closed and facing the camera body when the camera is not in use. You can protect the screen. - A mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen faces subjects in front of the camera. Changing the Interface Language Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone Connecting the Camera to a Smartphone Automatic Sensor Cleaning Battery Level Indicator  text_image OFF LOCK ON NODE AT-ON • Note

- If you set the power switch to < while an image is being recorded to the card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the recording finishes.

Changing the Interface Language

Set the Language if the [Language] setting screen appears after you turn on the camera.

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

Set the Date/Time/Zone if the [Date/Time/Zone] setting screen appears.

Connecting the Camera to a Smartphone

Instructions for connecting to a smartphone are displayed if you select [OK] when the setup screen appears (☐)

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

• Whenever the power switch is set to < >, the sensor is cleaned automatically (which may make a faint sound). During the sensor cleaning, the screen will display [ ]. To enable automatic sensor cleaning when the power switch is set to < > as well, you can set this in [ : Sensor cleaning] (
• If you repeatedly turn the power switch to < / > or < / > within a short time period, the [icon] icon may not be displayed, but this does not indicate the camera is malfunctioning.

When the power switch is set to < , the battery level will be indicated.

Display
Level (%) 100–70 69–50 49–20	19–10 9–1 0

Caution

• Remaining capacity may not be displayed correctly under some shooting conditions.
• Battery performance may decrease at low temperatures. Under these conditions, keep the camera warm in a pocket or similar container until you will use it. At this time, keep your pocket free of metal objects such as key chains. Contact with metal objects may short-circuit the battery.
• Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture. • Using Image Stabilizer. • Using Wi-Fi features. • Using the screen frequently. • Using accessories compatible with the multi-function shoe.
• The number of available shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting conditions.
• Lens operations are powered by the camera's battery. Certain lenses may exhaust the battery faster than others.
• In low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a sufficient battery level.

Note

See [Battery info.] to check the battery status ().

Attaching a Lens

Detaching a Lens

Caution

• Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision.
• When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera's power switch to < >. OFF
• If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not touch the rotating part.

Tips for avoiding smudges and dust

• When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
• When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body cap to the camera.
• Remove smudges and dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Note

- With RF-S lenses, an approx. 1.6× crop factor is applied to the center of the regular image area.

1. Remove the caps.

- Remove the rear lens cap (1) and body cap (2) by turning them as shown by the arrows.

2. Attach the lens.

- Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks in place.

3. Set the focus mode to AF.

• AF stands for autofocus. MF stands for manual focus. Autofocus is disabled.

For RF lenses with a focus mode switch Set the lens's focus mode switch to < AF

For RF lenses without a focus mode switch Set [AF Focus mode] to [AF].

4. Remove the front lens cap.

While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. - Attach the rear lens cap to the lens you removed.

Attaching a Lens Detaching a Lens

All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching an optional Mount Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Note

- With EF-S lenses, an approx. 1.6 × crop factor is applied to the center of the regular image area.

Attaching a Lens

1. Remove the caps.

- Remove the rear lens cap (1) and body cap (2) by turning them as shown by the arrows.

2. Attach the lens to the adapter.

- Align the red or white mount index on the lens with the corresponding mount index on the adapter and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

(3) Red index (4) White index

3. Attach the adapter to the camera.

- Align the red mount indexes (5) on the adapter and camera and turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it clicks into place.

4. Set the lens's focus mode switch to AF.

• AF stands for autofocus.
• MF stands for manual focus. Autofocus will not operate.

5. Remove the front lens cap.

1. While pressing the lens release button, turn the adapter as shown by the arrow.

Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it.

1. Detach the lens from the adapter.

Hold down the lens release lever on the adapter and turn the lens counterclockwise. - Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. - Attach the rear lens cap to the lens you removed.

Caution

For lens precautions, see Attaching and Detaching RF/RF-S Lenses.

Using the Multi-Function Shoe

The multi-function shoe is a hot shoe that supplies power to accessories and offers advanced communication functionality.

Using the Multi-Function Shoe

Removing the shoe cover

• Place your finger on the shoe cover (1) as shown in the figure and press down on part (A) as you pull the cover off in the direction shown. If removal is difficult, try pulling the cover off with a finger placed on part (B). After removal, keep the shoe cover in a convenient place to avoid losing it.

Attaching accessories

• When attaching accessories that communicate through contacts of the multi-function shoe, insert the accessory's mounting foot until it clicks into place, then slide the mounting foot locking lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction Manual. The following accessories cannot be attached directly to the multi-function shoe.

• Speedlite EL-1/600EXII-RT/600EX-RT/580EX II • Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT (Ver. 2)/ST-E3-RT - Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 • GPS Receiver GP-E2

To use the accessories listed above with the camera, you will need Multi-Function Shoe Adapter AD-E1, sold separately. For details, refer to the AD-E1 Instruction Manual. - When attaching accessories other than these that are designed for regular hot shoes, insert the accessory's mounting foot all the way in, then slide the mounting foot locking lever to secure it. For details, refer to the accessory's Instruction Manual. Electronic Viewfinder EVF-DC2/EVF-DC1 cannot be attached to the multi-function shoe. Attempting to attach the accessories by force may damage them or the multi-function shoe.

Attaching the shoe cover

After removing accessories from the multi-function shoe, reattach the shoe cover to protect the contacts from dust and water. - Slide the shoe cover in the direction shown, as you press down on part (A), until part (B) is fully inserted.

Caution

• Attach accessories correctly as described in Attaching accessories. Incorrect attachment may cause the camera or accessories to malfunction, and accessories may fall off.
• Blow off any foreign material on the multi-function shoe with a commercially available blower or similar tool.
• If the multi-function shoe becomes wet, turn off the camera and allow it to dry before use. • Use the shoe cover included with the camera.

Dioptric Adjustment Using Eyecup ER-kE (Sold Separately)

Look through the viewfinder to activate it. You can also restrict display to either the screen or viewfinder ( )

Dioptric Adjustment

Adjust the diopter for clear viewfinder display.

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob left or right.

Caution

The viewfinder and screen cannot be activated at the same time. - At some aspect ratios, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the screen. These areas are not recorded.

Outdoors, using Eyecup ER-kE may improve eye control accuracy and viewfinder visibility.

1. Attach Eyecup ER-kE.

Hold Eyecup ER-kE as shown in both hands.

- Insert the side of Eyecup ER-kE with ▼ markings into the groove around the camera eyecup, then press down from above until the accessory is fully attached.

Caution

- When attaching Eyecup ER-kE, avoid pinching the edge of the camera eyecup (A). With this edge pinched, Eyecup ER-kE can easily come off.

- With Eyecup ER-kE fully inserted, press the lower part toward the camera.

- You can rotate Eyecup ER-kE as necessary for adjustment. It clicks every 90° and can be rotated 360°.

2. To remove Eyecup ER-kE:

- Press firmly on the top and bottom of Eyecup ER-kE.

Pull the top toward you and remove it from the camera eyecup.

Note that the rubber part may come off if pulled too forcefully.

Caution

• Speedlites or similar accessories cannot be attached or removed while Eyecup ER-kE is attached. Remove Eyecup ER-kE temporarily before attaching or removing other accessories. The dioptric adjustment knob cannot be operated while Eyecup ER-kE is attached. Adjust the diopter before attaching Eyecup ER-kE.

Note

(B)

- Eyecup ER-kE has a strap mount (B) to prevent the eyecup from being dropped. Pass a commercially available strap through (B) and the camera strap or other parts to secure it.

Performing Calibration Using Eye Control for AF Configuring Pointer Display Managing Calibration Data

You can control focusing by looking at AF points to select them in viewfinder shooting (eye control).

Caution

- Eye control is only available in still photo shooting.

Performing Calibration

The process of registering characteristics of your line of sight for accurate detection of eye movement by the camera in viewfinder shooting is called calibration. Calibration enables higher eye control accuracy.

Points to know before calibration

Be aware of the following points before calibration.

It may not be possible to detect your line of sight if you are squinting. If so, open your eye or eyes wider as you look at the viewfinder. It may not be possible to detect your line of sight if your eye is too close to the viewfinder. If so, keep your eye a little farther from the viewfinder. Using Eyecup ER-kE (sold separately) makes it easier to detect your line of sight. During calibration, keep looking at indicators until they disappear completely. - Eye control may be less accurate if your eye is off-center, relative to the viewfinder. Adjust how you are holding the camera to your face, so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced. - Eye control may be less accurate if you point the camera downward during calibration. Hold the camera straight when performing calibration.

Note

- Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.

Calibration operations

After adjusting the viewfinder (☐) perform calibration under the same conditions as when you will shoot (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).

During calibration, keep your eye near the viewfinder.

1. Select [Eye control] (✗)
2. Select [Calibration (CAL)].

- Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the current [CAL no.] number.

1. Select [Start].

4. Look through the viewfinder.

• Holding the camera horizontally, look through the viewfinder so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced.
• Press the < > button.

5. Start calibration.

• Look at the indicator displayed and press the < P button.
• Keep looking at the indicator without blinking until it disappears. This process is repeated for indicators at five positions (center, right, left, top, and bottom).

6. Perform calibration for vertical shooting.

• For higher eye control accuracy, select [Refine] and perform calibration for vertical shooting.
• Holding the camera vertically, look through the viewfinder so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced, then repeat step 5.
• If you will also shoot vertically with the camera grip facing the other direction, perform calibration while holding the camera that way.
• To finish calibration after performing calibration only for horizontal shooting, go to step 7.

7. Exit calibration.

- Select [Exit]. Calibration results (calibration data) are saved to the calibration number shown in step 2.

8. Verify pointer movement.

After calibration, look through the viewfinder and make sure the pointer moves in response (If the pointer does not seem to follow your gaze closely, perform calibration again.

Adding calibration data

To register calibration data for other users or eyewear conditions (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses), select an available number to assign the data to from the numbers labeled with [] on the [CAL no.] screen, then perform calibration.

Caution

● Always use eye control under the same eyewear conditions as when you performed calibration (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).

Note

Also read General eye control precautions and Enhancing eye control accuracy.

Menu settings

1. Select [Eye control] (☐) ☑
2. Select [Eye control]

1. Select [On].

- You can enable switching between [Eye control] [On] and [Off] from the Quick Control screen by customizing the Quick Control screen (

4. Select [CAL no.].

- Select a calibration number matching your eyewear conditions (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses).

5. Select calibration data to use.

Press <

Operations in viewfinder shooting

1. Look at the subject.

A pointer (1) is displayed when you look through the viewfinder.

After the subject set in [Subject to detect] is detected, a tracking frame (2) is also displayed.

Look at the position where you wish to focus.

The pointer may stop moving unless the camera can follow your eye movement. If so, hold the camera away from your face for a moment, then look through the viewfinder again so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced.

2. Confirm the subject to start focusing.

- Pressing the shutter button halfway confirms the subject to focus on.

- With [AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera focuses in the area near the pointer.

With the AF area set to an option other than [Whole area AF], the camera focuses after moving the AF area near the pointer.

With [AF operation] set to [Servo]

(3)

The active AF point (3) is displayed in blue.

As long as you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera keeps tracking and focusing on the confirmed subject, so there's no need for you to keep following it with your eye.

- To switch to another subject to track, first stop tracking the confirmed subject by pressing the button, then look at the new subject and hold down the shutter button halfway.

- With [AF area] set to [Whole area AF], the camera keeps tracking and focusing on confirmed subjects even when you release the shutter button after holding it down halfway. To stop tracking confirmed subjects, press the shutter button halfway again.

With [AF operation] set to [ONE SHOT]

Once the subject is in focus, the AF point turns green. - Pressing the shutter button halfway sets the focus on the current position.

3. Shoot.

- Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

Caution

- If the AF point does not move to your specified position after you confirm the subject, hold the camera away from your face, then look through the viewfinder again, or perform calibration again.

Note

- You can assign eye control subject confirmation ([Move AF point by eye control]) and AF activation ([Metering and AF start]) to different buttons in [Customize buttons for shooting].

Using eye control to display the focus guide

By setting [AF: Focus guide] to [On], you can use eye control to display the focus guide for assistance when focusing manually.

1. Look at the subject.

Look at the subject to focus on.

2. Press the shutter button halfway.

The focus guide (4) is displayed where you are looking.

For details on using the focus guide to focus, see Focus Guide.

Note

- A tracking frame [] is also displayed after the subject set in [ : Subject to detect] is detected.

General eye control precautions

• When multiple people will use eye control on the same camera, each person should select a different calibration number and perform calibration. Similarly, when the same person will use eye control with and without glasses or contact lenses, a different calibration number should be selected and calibration performed for each situation.
• When using Eyecup ER-kE (sold separately), select a different calibration number and perform calibration.
• Keep your eye steady relative to the camera, with sunlight or other light blocked out and the four corners of the screen appearing evenly spaced.
• Calibration or eye control may not be possible in the following cases.
• When hard contact lenses are worn
• When color contact lenses are worn
• When you have had eye surgery or other medical treatment
• When special eyewear is worn, such as near-infrared blocking, mirrored, or bifocal glasses or sunglasses
• When a mask is worn
• When your eye is too far from the viewfinder
• When your eye is too close to the viewfinder
• When your eye is too misaligned with the viewfinder
• When the viewfinder or your eyewear is dirty
• When the viewfinder is fogged up
• When your contact lenses are not fully in contact with your eyes
• When sunlight is shining directly into the viewfinder

- Less responsive viewfinder display under low light may make eye control more difficult to use.

Enhancing eye control accuracy

The camera can learn about eye characteristics from the calibration data it collects.

• Eye control accuracy can be improved by repeating calibration under various levels of brightness (such as indoors, outdoors, during the day, and at night) for the same calibration number.
• To use eye control in each camera orientation, repeat calibration for the same calibration number with the camera held horizontally and vertically with the grip up and down.
• Keep the following tips in mind when performing calibration or using eye control.
• Look into the viewfinder so that the four corners of the screen appear evenly spaced.
• Look at the subject.
• Avoid squinting.
• Avoid blinking.
• During calibration, look through the viewfinder as you do when shooting.
• If you use glasses, wear them correctly.
• In calibration outdoors, prevent sunlight from entering the viewfinder.
• Use Eyecup ER-kE (sold separately, k)
• Block out sunlight, to the extent possible, by keeping your face close to the viewfinder.
• If it is difficult to perform calibration or eye control correctly, try keeping both eyes open as you look through the viewfinder.

- Eye control accuracy can also be improved with the data collected from repeated calibration (2–3 times) for the same calibration number even under the same brightness and with the camera in the same position.

You can configure pointer display, including whether the pointer is visible or not.

- Pointer display

Pointer visibility can be set to [On], [Shtg standby], or [Off].

• Select [Shtg standby] to keep the pointer visible from when you look through the viewfinder until the moment you confirm the subject to focus on using eye control.
• In [MF] focus mode, setting [AF: Focus guide] to [On] makes the pointer visible.

- Sensitivity

Sensitivity of the pointer in response to eye movement is adjustable.

• Set toward the positive end to make the pointer responsive even to subtle eye movement.
• Set toward the negative end to make the pointer less responsive.

Color

Choose [Orange], [Purple], or [White] as the pointer color.

- Display size

Choose [Standard] or [Small] as the pointer display size.

- Display format

Choose [◎] or [●] as the style of pointer displayed.

Entering names

You can enter names to identify calibration data.

1. Select a calibration data number.

- Select the number and press the < > button.

2. Enter text.

• Use the < > or < > dial or < > to select a character, then press < > to enter it.
• By selecting []; you can change the input mode. To delete single characters, select [] or press the <> button.
• When you are finished entering text, press the < > button and select [OK].

Saving and loading calibration data

Registered calibration data can be saved to a card. You can also load calibration data from a card to use it.

1. Select [Calibration (CAL)].

2. Select [Save/load (card)].

3. Select [Save to card].

• Select [Save to card] to save all calibration data on the camera to the card.
• Select [Load from card] to overwrite calibration data on the camera with calibration data from the card.

Deleting calibration data

Eye control is less accurate if the same calibration number is used for calibration under different eyewear conditions (such as with or without glasses or contact lenses) or by multiple users. In this case, delete the calibration data and perform calibration again.

1. Select [Calibration (CAL)].

2. Select [Delete].

3. Delete the calibration data.

• Select the data to delete and press < To delete all calibration data, select [Delete all] and press < After you select [OK] on the confirmation screen, the data is deleted.

Holding the Camera Shutter Button < > Main Dial < > Quick Control Dial 1 < > Quick Control Dial 2 < Multi-Controller ☑ <MODEButton ≤ M -MultiFunction/FTP Server Image Transfer Button ☑ < > AFON Start Button < >Multifunction Lock Switch < /> LCP Panel Info Switching/Illumination/Cropping Button ≤ Control Ring <Info Button

• Viewing the screen as you shoot

As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see Using the Screen.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Normal angle

(2) Low angle (3) High angle

- Shooting through the viewfinder

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

(1) Horizontal shooting (2) Vertical shooting

1. With your right hand, hold the camera firmly by the camera grip.
2. With your left hand, support the lens from below.
3. Rest your right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Rest your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other. 6. Hold the camera near your face and look through the viewfinder.

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing halfway

This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture value.

The exposure value (shutter speed and aperture value) is displayed on the screen, in the viewfinder, or on the LCD panel for 8 sec. (metering timer/ ⚙8).

Pressing completely

This releases the shutter and takes the picture.

Preventing camera shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following:

Hold the camera still, as shown in Holding the Camera. - Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the shutter button completely.

Note

The camera will still pause before taking a picture if you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first, or if you press the shutter button halfway and immediately press it completely. Even during menu display or image playback, you can return to shooting standby by pressing the shutter button halfway.

(1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial.

Press a button such as < > or < >, then turn the < > dial.

If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.

After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to select a shooting mode. After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to set the white balance, drive mode,* flash exposure compensation,* or Picture Style.

* Available only in still photo shooting.

(2) Turn only the < > dial.

Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed, aperture value, etc.

Note

The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multi-function lock (A)

(1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial.

Press a button such as < > or < >, then turn the < > dial.

If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.

After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to select a shooting mode.

After the < > button is pressed, the dial is used to set the metering mode, * AF operation, * ISO speed, * or AF area.

* Available only in still photo shooting.

(2) Turn only the < > dial.

Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.

- Used for operations such as setting the exposure compensation amount and the aperture value setting for manual exposures.

Note

The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multi-function lock (☐)

(1) After pressing a button, turn the < > dial.

Press a button such as < >, then turn the < > dial.

If you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will go back to shooting standby.

• Used for operations such as switching between main tabs on the menu screen.

(2) Turn only the < > dial.

Turn the < > dial while looking at the screen, viewfinder, or LCD panel.

• Used for operations such as setting the ISO speed.

Note

- The operations in (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multi-function lock (☐)

< > is an eight-direction key with center button. To use it, press lightly with the tip of your thumb.

Examples of using the Multi-controller

• AF point/magnified frame movement in still photo shooting or movie recording
• White balance correction • Magnified area position movement during playback
• Quick Control
• Selecting or setting menu items

You can set the shooting mode.

- Press the <P> button, then use <>, <>, <>, or <> to select a shooting mode.

Shooting screen

By default, the <M> button works in conjunction with dials to enable you to adjust settings used in shooting or recording.

Settings you can configure in conjunction with dials

• White balance ( ) Drive mode* ( )
• Flash exposure compensation* ( ) Picture Style ( ) Metering mode* (☐) AF operation* ( ) ISO speed ( ) AF area ( )

* Available only in still photo shooting.

How to use with dials

• Press the <> button to display the settings you can configure with dials ( ). Press the <> button again repeatedly (or turn the <> dial) to select a setting to configure. To adjust the upper row of setting items, turn the <> dial. To adjust the lower row of setting items, turn the <> dial.

Caution

Advanced white balance settings such as color temperature cannot be configured this way.

Note

To set the AF area, you can also press the < > button and then the < > button.

Playback screen

Pressing the <button on the playback screen transfers images to the FTP server.

Equivalent to pressing the shutter button halfway (except in [mode]).

Configuring [Multi function lock] ( ) and setting the power/multi-function lock switch to < > prevents settings from being changed by accidentally touching the Main dial, Quick control dials, Multi-controller, control ring, or touch-screen panel.

Each press of the < > button changes the information on the LCD panel. - Illuminate the LCD panel by holding down the < > button (). Ⓧ6 - Pressing the < ➕ button on the playback screen switches to [ : Cropping] settings.

By default, exposure compensation can be set by turning the control ring of RF lenses or mount adapters while pressing the shutter button halfway in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], or [M] mode. Otherwise, you can assign a different function to the control ring by configuring [in [Customize dials/control ring] ( ).

Each press of the < > button changes the information shown.

The following sample screens are for still photos. (5) and (6) are not shown in the viewfinder.

(1)

(2)

(6)

(3)

(5)

(4)

Menu Screen in [Mode] Menu Screen in [Fv]/[P]/[Tv]/[Av]/[M]/[BULB] Mode Menu Setting Procedure Dimmed Menu Items

In [Mode], some tabs and menu items are not displayed.

(1) Main tabs (2) Secondary tabs (3) Secondary tab name (4) Menu items (5) : Shooting (6) : Autofocus (7) ▶: Playback (8) : Communication functions (9) : Set-up (10): Control customization (11) : Custom Functions (12) ★: My Menu (13) Menu settings

1. Press the < > button.

The menu is displayed.

2. Select a tab.

Each time you turn the < > dial, the main tab (group of functions) will switch. You can also switch tabs by pressing the < □> button. - Turn the <> dial to select a secondary tab.

3. Select an item.

Turn the < > dial to select an item, then press < >. SET

4. Select an option.

• Turn the < > dial to select an option. The current setting is indicated in blue.

5. Set an option.

• Press < to set it.

6. Exit the setting.

- Press the < > button to return to shooting standby.

Note

• The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the button to display the menu screen.
• Menu operations are also possible by tapping the menu screen or using < To cancel the operation, press the < > button.

Example: When focus bracketing has been set

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. Use of these items has been limited by other functions that have been set.

To investigate the limiting function, select a dimmed item and press < >. Canceling the limiting function will enable you to configure the dimmed menu item.

Caution

It may not be possible to check the limiting function for some setting items.

Note

In [Reset camera], you can reset menu functions to the default settings by selecting [Basic settings] in [Reset individual settings] (4)

Quick Control in Still Photo Shooting or Playback Quick Control in Movie Recording

You can directly and intuitively select and set the settings displayed.

Quick Control in Still Photo Shooting or Playback

1. Press the < > button (). Ⓞ10

2. Select a setting item and set your preferred option.

To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down. To adjust the setting, turn the < > or < > dial, or press < > left or right. Some items are set by pressing a button after this. - You can customize the setting items on the screen shown above in [☐customize Quick Controls] (). - To access the Customize Quick Controls screen, press and hold the < > button ().

• Press < > vertically or horizontally to select an item on the screen shown above. To adjust the setting, turn the < >, < >, or < > dial. Some items are set by pressing a button after this.

As in still photo shooting, press the < > button to access the Quick Control screen. Each press of the < > button switches between screens if you have selected ([ ]) both [Display 1] and [Display 2] in [ ]: Quick Ctrl screen] ( ), but only the selected screen is displayed if one is selected ([ ).

[Display 1] [Display 2]

Movie recording screen

Use the [Display 1] screen as described in Quick Control in Still Photo Shooting or Playback. Use the [Display 2] screen as follows.

1. Switch pages as needed.

Turn the < > or < > dial to switch pages. - You can also switch pages by tapping (A) or swiping left or right.

2. Select an item.

- Turn the < > dial or press < > vertically or horizontally to select an item, then press the < >.

3. Select an option.

To select an option, turn the <>, <>, or <> dial or press <> up or down (or in some cases, left or right).

Detailed settings screen

Turn the < ≥ dial to select a tab (1). - Press < *vertically or horizontally to change the setting (2). - Press < to confirm your selection and return to the screen in step 2.

4. Set an option.

- Press < to set it.

5. Exit the setting.

- Press the < ▶ button to return to shooting standby.

Tapping

Dragging

Tapping

Sample screen (Quick Control)

Use your finger to tap (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the screen. For example, when you tap [the Quick Control screen appears. By tapping [], you can return to the preceding screen.

Note

To have the camera beep for touch operations, set [☐: Beep] to [Enable] (☑). Responsiveness to touch operations can be adjusted in [Touch control] ().

Sample screen (Menu screen)

- Slide your finger while touching the screen.

This chapter describes shooting modes.

• A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) • A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) • Fv: Flexible-Priority AE • P: Program AE • Tv: Shutter-Priority AE • Av: Aperture-Priority AE • M: Manual Exposure • BULB: Long (Bulb) Exposures

A+: Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

[1] is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject.

1. Set the shooting mode to [A+]

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [].

2. Aim the camera at what you will shoot (the subject).

- A tracking frame (1) may be displayed on the subject, under some shooting conditions.

3. Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• You can also focus by tapping a person's face or other subject on the screen (Touch AF). Under low light, the AF-assist beam (✓) is automatically activated if needed. Once the subject is in focus, that AF point turns green and the camera beeps (One-Shot AF). An AF point in focus on a moving subject turns blue and tracks subject movement (Servo AF).

4. Take the picture.

• Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. The image just captured will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the screen.

Caution

- Subject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected correctly for some subjects or shooting conditions.

Note

• AF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF operation cannot be switched during shooting.
• [mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes. If you prefer other color tones, set the shooting mode to [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], or [M] and select a Picture Style other than [s=A] before shooting (☑).

Minimizing blurred photos

• Be careful about camera shake in handheld shots. To avoid camera shake, consider using a tripod. Use a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment. Attach the camera securely to the tripod.
• Using a remote switch (sold separately) or a wireless remote control (sold separately) is recommended.

? FAQ

- Focusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).

Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter button halfway (☐). If you are too close to the subject, move away and shoot again.

After focusing, multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.

Focus has been achieved at all those points.

The shutter speed display is blinking.

Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately, 📋) is recommended.

The bottom of pictures taken with flash is unnaturally dark.

If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct light from the flash. If the subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.

Note

Note the following if you are not using flash.

- Under low light, when camera shake tends to occur, hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, you can reduce the blur caused by camera shake by setting the lens to the wide-angle end.

- When shooting portraits under low light, tell subjects to stay still until you have finished shooting. Any movement as you shoot will make the person look blurry in the picture.

A+: Fully Automatic Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

√ Shooting Moving Subjects

Scene Icons

Shooting Moving Subjects

Pressing the shutter button halfway tracks moving subjects to keep them in focus. Keep the subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.

The camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated in the upper left of the screen. For icon details, see Scene Icons.

Enables the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to be set automatically or manually. Equivalent to shooting in [P], [Tv], [Av], or [M] mode without needing to switch to these modes.

* [Fv] stands for Flexible value. * AE stands for Auto Exposure.

1. Set the shooting mode to [Fv].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Fv].

2. Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.

• Turn the < > dial to select an item to set. [ ] appears to the left of the selected item.
• Turn the < > dial to set the option. To reset the setting to [AUTO], press the < > button.

3. Set the amount of exposure compensation.

- Turn the < > dial and select the exposure level indicator. [ ] or [ appears to the left of the exposure level indicator.

Turn the < > or < > dial to set the level.

To reset the setting to [±0], press the < > button.

Combinations of functions in [Fv] mode

Shutter Speed Aperture Value ISO Speed			Exposure Compensation	Shooting Mode
[AUTO] [AUTO]		[AUTO]	Available Equivalent to [P]
		Manual selection
Manual selection [AUTO]		[AUTO]	Available Equivalent to [Tv]
		Manual selection
[AUTO] Manual selection		[AUTO]	Available Equivalent to [Av]
		Manual selection
Manual selection Manual selection		[AUTO] Available	Equivalent to [M]
		Manual selection —

Caution

- Blinking of the values indicates a risk of underexposure or overexposure. Adjust the exposure until the value stops blinking.

Slow synchro is not used under low light when you have set up [Fv] mode to resemble [P] or [Av] mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [☐: External Speedlite control] is set to [1/*-30sec. auto].*

* 1: The value of "1/*" varies depending on current settings.

Note

Values for shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are underlined. - You can set shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure compensation amount to [±0] in step 2 or 3 by holding down the < > button.

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to suit the subject's brightness.

* [P] stands for Program.

1. Set the shooting mode to [P].

- Press the <P> button, then turn the < > dial to select [P].

2. Focus on the subject.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is in focus, an AF point is displayed (in green for One-Shot AF or blue for Servo AF). The shutter speed and aperture value are set automatically.

3. Check the display.

As long as the exposure value is not blinking, standard exposure will be obtained.

4. Take the picture.

- Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely.

Caution

• If a slow shutter speed and low aperture value blink, the subject is too dark. Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
• If a fast shutter speed and high aperture value blink, the subject is too bright. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens.

Note

Differences between [P] and [A] modes

- [mode limits available functions and sets the AF area, metering mode, and many other functions automatically to prevent bad shots. In contrast, [P] mode only sets the shutter speed and aperture value automatically, and you can freely set the AF area, metering mode, and other functions.

Program shift

In [P] mode, you can freely change the combination (program) of shutter speed and aperture value set automatically by the camera while maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift. - With Program shift, you can press the shutter button halfway, then turn the < > dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture value is displayed. - Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends (exposure setting display turns off). - Program shift cannot be used with flash.

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture value to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.

* [Tv] stands for Time value.

Blurred motion (Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen motion (Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)

1. Set the shooting mode to [Tv].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Tv].

2. Set the desired shutter speed.

Turn the < > dial to set it.

3. Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway. The aperture value is set automatically.

4. Check the display and shoot.

As long as the aperture value is not blinking, the standard exposure will be obtained.

Caution

- If the lowest aperture value blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the < > dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.

- If the highest aperture value blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the < > dial to set a faster shutter speed until the aperture value stops blinking, or set a lower ISO speed.

Note

["] in shutter speed display stands for "seconds." ([0"5] → 0.5 sec., [15"] → 15 sec., etc.)

Depth-of-Field Preview

In this mode, you set the desired aperture value and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.

* [Av] stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

Blurred background (With a low aperture value: f/5.6)

Sharp foreground and background (With a high aperture value: f/32)

1. Set the shooting mode to [Av].

• Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [Av].

2. Set the desired aperture value.

Turn the < > dial to set it.

3. Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway. The shutter speed is set automatically.

4. Check the display and shoot.

As long as the shutter speed is not blinking, the standard exposure will be obtained.

Caution

If a slow shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <gg> dial to decrease the aperture value (open the aperture) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed. If a fast shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <📋> dial to increase aperture value (close the aperture) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.

Note

Aperture value display

The higher the value, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The aperture value displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera, [F00] will be displayed for the aperture.

Depth-of-Field Preview

Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture value setting and check the area in focus (depth of field).

Note

• The larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground to the background.
• The depth-of-field effect is readily apparent on images as you change the aperture value and press the depth-of-field preview button.
• Exposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.

Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture value as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use a commercially available exposure meter.

* [M] stands for Manual.

1. Set the shooting mode to [M].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [M].

2. Set the ISO speed ( Ω )

Turn the < > dial to set it. With ISO Auto, you can set exposure compensation (

3. Set the shutter speed and aperture value.

- To set the shutter speed, turn the < > dial, and to set the aperture value, turn the < > dial.

4. Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway.
• Check the exposure level mark [] to see how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level.

(1) Standard exposure index

(2) Exposure level mark

5. Set the exposure and take the picture.

- Check the exposure level indicator and set the desired shutter speed and aperture value.

Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure compensation as follows:

Tap the exposure level indicator • [Expo.comp./AEB] - Quick Control screen. Turn the control ring while pressing the shutter button halfway.

Caution

• Exposure may not be as expected when ISO Auto is set, because the ISO speed is adjusted to ensure standard exposure for your specified shutter speed and aperture value. In this case, set the exposure compensation.
• Exposure compensation is not applied in flash photography with ISO Auto, even if you have set an exposure compensation amount.

Note

In [M] mode with ISO Auto, [Evaluative metering], and [AE lock meter. mode after focus] set to the default setting (holding down the shutter button halfway locks the ISO speed after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF). - When ISO Auto is set, you can press the <*> button to lock the ISO speed. - If you press the <*> button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to when the <*> button was pressed. - Any existing exposure compensation amount is maintained if you switch to [M] mode with ISO Auto after using exposure compensation in [P], [Tv], or [Av] mode. - To coordinate exposure compensation in 1/2-stop increments with ISO speed set in 1/3-stop increments when [Exposure level increments] is set to [1/2-stop] and used with ISO Auto, exposure compensation is further adjusted by adjusting shutter speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will not change.

Bulb Timer

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, astrophotography, and other subjects requiring long exposures.

1. Set the shooting mode to [BULB].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [BULB].

2. Set the desired aperture value.

Turn the < > dial to set it.

3. Take the picture.

• The exposure will continue for as long as you keep the shutter button pressed completely.
• Elapsed exposure time is displayed on the LCD panel.

Caution

• Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components.
• Long bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual. ISO 400 is used when the camera is set to ISO Auto.
• When shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb exposure time).

Note

• You can reduce the noise generated during long exposures by using [long exp. noise reduction] (7)
• Using a tripod and the bulb timer is recommended for bulb exposures.
• You can also shoot bulb exposures with Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately, 📋)
• You can also shoot bulb exposures with Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). When you press the remote controller's release (transmit) button, the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure.

You can set the exposure time for bulb exposures in advance. This feature eliminates the need to keep holding down the shutter button during bulb exposures, which can reduce camera shake.

Note that the bulb timer can only be set and will only take effect in [BULB] (bulb exposure) mode.

1. Select [bulb timer] ().
2. Select [Enable].

- Select [Enable], then press the < > button.

1. Set the exposure time.

- Select an option (hours : minutes : seconds).

- Press < ≥ to display [ ].

Set a value, then press < (Returns to [].) □

4. Select [OK].

5. Take the picture.

After you press the shutter button completely, the bulb exposure continues for your specified time. - [TIMER] exposure time are displayed on the LCD panel during bulb timer shooting. To clear the timer setting, select [Disable] in step 2.

Caution

• Bulb exposure stops if you press the shutter button completely and release it during the timer.
• Bulb exposure continues even after your specified exposure time if you keep pressing the shutter button completely (which overrides automatic stopping when your specified exposure time elapses).
• The bulb timer is cleared (and reverts to [Disable]) when you switch shooting modes.

This chapter describes shooting and recording and introduces menu settings on the shooting [ ] tab.

• Still Photo Shooting
• Movie Recording

To prepare for still photo shooting, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to

< then press the <> button and choose a shooting mode.

☆ to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] mode.

• Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

• Image Quality

• Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio

• Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ☆

• ISO Speed Settings for Still Photos ★

• Anti-Flicker Shooting ☆

• High-Frequency Anti-Flicker Shooting ☆

- Shooting with Speedlites ☆

- Flash Function Settings ☆

• Picture Style Selection ★

• Picture Style Customization ☆

• Picture Style Registration ☆

- HDR Shooting (PQ) ☆

• Color Space ☆

- Clarity ☆

• Auto Lighting Optimizer ☆

- Highlight Tone Priority ☆

- White Balance ☆

• Custom White Balance ☆
• White Balance Correction ☆
• Lens Aberration Correction ☆
• Long Exposure Noise Reduction ☆ • High ISO Speed Noise Reduction ★ • Dust Delete Data Acquisition ☆
• Multiple Exposures ☆
• Focus Bracketing ☆ • Pre-Continuous Shooting ★
• Interval Timer Shooting
• Silent Shutter Function ☆
• Shutter Mode ☆
• Enabling Shutter Release Without a Card • Image Stabilizer (IS Mode)
• Customizing Quick Controls ★ • Shooting with the Touch Shutter • Image Review • High-Speed Display☆
• Metering Timer ☆ • HDR/C. Log View Assist ★
• Display Simulation ☆ • Optical Viewfinder Simulation ☆
• Blackout-Free Display ☆
• Shooting Information Display
• Reverse Display
• Display Frame Rate • Viewfinder Display Format • Auto Power Off Temperature
• Metering Mode Selection ☆ • AE for Priority Subjects During AF ☆

• Manual Exposure Compensation - Exposure Lock (AE Lock) ☆ • General Still Photo Shooting

• Image quality/size

(1) JPEG/HEIF (2) Img type/size (3) Cropping/aspect ratio

- Exposure

(1) Expo.comp./AEB ☆ (2) ISO speed settings ☆ (3) Anti-flicker shooting ☆ (4) HF anti-flicker shooting ☆ (5) External Speedlite control ☆ (6) Metering mode ☆ (7) Detect priority AE while AF ☆

• Color/tone/Dynamic range

(1) Picture Style

• Picture Style Selection ☆ • Picture Style Customization ☆ • Picture Style Registration ☆

(2) Color space ☆ (3) Clarity ☆ (4) HDR shooting (PQ) ☆ (5) Auto Lighting Optimizer ☆ (6) Highlight tone priority ☆

• White balance/Quality correction

(1) White balance ☆ (2) Set Custom WB ☆ (3) WB Shift/Bkt. ☆ (4) Lens aberration correction ☆ (5) Long exp. noise reduction (6) High ISO speed NR (7) Dust Delete Data ☆

- Various shooting

(1) Multiple exposure ☆ (2) Focus bracketing ☆

- Shutter control

(1) Drive mode (2) Pre-cont. shooting ☆ (3) Interval timer (4) Bulb timer ☆ (5) Silent shutter function ☆ (6) Shutter mode ☆ (7) Release shutter without card

- Assist shooting

(1) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode (2) Customize Quick Controls (3) Metering timer ☆

- Assist shooting

(1) Image review (2) High speed display ☆ (3) Blackout-free display ☆ (4) Display simulation ☆ (5) OVF sim. view assist ☆ (6) F.D.V.O.Log View Assist. ☆

Caution

- [IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is not displayed when an IS-equipped lens is attached.

- Assist shooting

(1) Shooting info. disp. (2) Display frame rate set. (3) VF display format (4) Reverse display (5) Auto pwr off temp.

Image Size Selection RAW Images Guide to Image Quality Settings Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting JPEG/HEIF Quality

Note

- "Image quality" in this guide refers to both image size and JPEG/HEIF quality (

Image Size Selection

You can specify L, M, S1, or S2 for JPEG/HEIF images and RAW for RAW images.

Note

- HEIF is available when [HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ]. You can convert these images to JPEG images after shooting.

1. Select [img type/size] ().

The screen displayed varies depending on [rec options] settings in [Record func+card/folder sel.].

2. Set the image size.

Standard/Auto switch card/Record to multiple

• For RAW images, turn the dial to select the size, and for JPEG/HEIF images, turn the dial.
• Press the button to set it.

Record separately

- When [rec options] in [: Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec. separately], turn the dial to select [] for [], then press. Note that recording separately to and RAW is not CRAW available for RAW images.

- Select an image size on the screen displayed, then press.

Note

• L is set if you set both RAW and JPEG/HEIF to [ ].
• Two versions of each shot are recorded at your specified image quality when you have selected both RAW and JPEG/HEIF. Both images have the same file number but each has a different file extension, with .JPG for JPEG, .HIF for HEIF and .CR3 for RAW.
• To record in different image quality to each card (as a RAW and JPEG image, for example), set [Rec options] in [=: Record func+card/folder sel.] to [Rec. separately].
• Meanings of image size icons are as follows: RAW, : Compact RAW, JPEG: JPEG, HEIF: HEIF, Large, Medium, : Small 1, : Small 2.

RAW images are raw data from the image sensor in a digital form.

Compared to Ravage files, offers a smaller file sizes.

To process RAW images and save them as JPEG or HEIF images, you can use [:RAW image processing] (or Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).

For details on Digital Photo Professional, refer to the Digital Photo Professional instruction manual.

Note

• To view RAW images on a computer, consider using Digital Photo Professional (DPP). RAW images from this camera cannot be used with older versions of DPP. Download the latest version of DPP from the Canon website and install it, which will overwrite the previous version.
• Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW images captured by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.

See Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting for details on file size, number of shots available, maximum burst, and other estimated values.

The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the upper left of the shooting screen and lower right of the viewfinder.

Note

- If the maximum burst is displayed as "99", it indicates that you can shoot 99 or more shots continuously. Fewer shots are available for a value of 98 or lower, and when [BUSY] is displayed on the screen, internal memory is full and shooting will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all captured images have been written to a card, you can once again shoot at the maximum burst listed in Still photo file size / Number of possible shots / Maximum burst for continuous shooting.

1. Select [quality].

1. Select the desired image size.

- Select the image size, then press < ▶!

1. Set the desired quality (compression).

• Select the number, then press < ≥ 1>. ● Higher numbers offer higher quality (lower compression). Quality of 6–10 is indicated by < > and 1–5, by <>.

Note

- The higher the quality, the fewer shots will be available. In contrast, the lower the quality, the more shots will be available.

When using an RF or EF lens, you can change the aspect ratio before shooting. You can use [1.6x (crop)] to shoot as if using a telephoto lens, because this option magnifies the center of the image (an area equivalent to APS-C size).

With RF-S/EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically.

1. Select [natural: cropping/aspect ratio] ().
2. Select an option.

- To proceed without changing shooting area display, press < and go to step 4.

3. Select how the shooting area is displayed.

• On the screen in step 2, press the < > button.
• Select the type of display, then press < ※ .

Caution

• M / M image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with RF-S/EF-S lenses.
• Shooting with [1.6x (crop)] and image quality set to /M /M /S1 /S1 produces /// images, especially. [1.6x (crop)] is used automatically with RF-S/EF-S lenses.

4. Take the picture.

Setting examples

When Fis set

When [is set or an RF-S or EF-S lens is used]

When [1.6x (crop)] is set

When [4:3 (aspect ratio)] is set

• When [1.6x (crop)] is set or an RF-S/EF-S lens is used, an image magnified approx. 1.6× is displayed.
• When [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set, the image within the black masked or outlined area is captured.

Caution

Areas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with RF-S/EF-S lenses. [Shooting area] has no effect on display when [1.6x (crop)] is set, or with RF-S/EF-S lenses. [☐: Add cropping information] is only available when [Full-frame] is set. - When external flash units are used, flash auto zoom (automatic adjustment of flash coverage) based on the [Cropping/aspect ratio] setting is not performed.

Note

For details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see Recording pixel count for still photo recording. Nearly 100% field of view coverage is maintained vertically and horizontally when cropping or an aspect ratio is set. - Aspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio is set, which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played back, the image area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that only the shooting image area is shown in Slide Show.

In exposure bracketing, three consecutive images are captured at different exposures by automatically adjusting the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

1. Select [Expo.comp./AEB] ().
2. Set the AEB range.

- Turn the < > dial to set the AEB range (1). By turning the < > dial, you can set the exposure compensation amount.

- Press < to set it.

- When you close the menu, the AEB range will be displayed on the screen.

3. Take the picture.

Standard exposure

Decreased exposure

Increased exposure

Three bracketed shots are taken, according to the specified drive mode, in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure.

● AEB will not be automatically canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to turn off the AEB range display.

Caution

- Exposure compensation in AEB may be less effective with [Auto Lighting Optimizer] (set to an option other than [Disable]).

Note

• [✗]links in the lower left of the screen during AEB. - If the drive mode is set to [I], press the shutter button three times for each shot. In [O,H], [I], or [ ] mode, holding down the shutter button completely captures three images, one after another, before the camera automatically stops shooting. When [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured after a delay of 10 sec. When [ ] is set, three consecutive shots are captured after a delay of 2 sec. - You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation. ● AEB is not available in flash photography or bulb exposures, or focus bracketing. - AEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the power switch to < > off when the flash is fully charged.

ISO Speed Range When Set Manually ISO Speed Range Used with ISO Auto Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto

Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In [A ⁺ mode, ISO speed is set automatically.

For details on ISO speed in movie recording, see ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in movie recording.

Setting with a dial

1. Set the ISO speed.

With an image displayed on the screen, set by turning the < > dial. - Select [AUTO] to set the ISO speed automatically. - When [AUTO] is selected, pressing the shutter button halfway will display the ISO speed actually set. For details on the ISO Auto range, see ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in still photo shooting.

Setting ISO speed from a screen of options

1. Access the screen of ISO speed options.

Tap the ISO speed in the lower right of the screen.

2. Select an option.

Turn the < > dial or select a registered setting value. - You can register frequently used ISO speed setting values by specifying an option other than [AUTO] and selecting [Register].

Note

- To specify [AUTO] when setting [ISO speed] in [☐: ISO speed settings], press the < > button.

ISO speed guide

• Low ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of field), in some shooting conditions.
• High ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper depth of field), and longer flash range but may increase image noise.

Note

• ISO speed can also be set with the < > button by pressing the < > button to select the ISO speed item while an image is displayed. Can also be set on the [ISO speed] screen in [ISO speed settings].
• To expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H (equivalent to ISO 102400), adjust [ISO speed range] in [ISO speed settings] (

Caution

• Image noise (dots of light or banding) and irregular colors may increase and apparent resolution may decrease at H (equivalent to ISO 102400), because this is an expanded ISO speed. Because L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the dynamic range will be somewhat narrower compared to the standard setting.
• When shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure, or multiple exposure, image noise (graininess, dots of light, banding, etc.), irregular colors, or color shift may become noticeable.
• When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
• If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject, overexposure may result.

You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum limits).

1. Select [ISO speed settings] ().
2. Select [ISO speed range].

1. Set [Minimum].

• Select the [Minimum] box, then press < >.
• Select the ISO speed, then press < .

4. Set [Maximum].

• Select the [Maximum] box, then press <
• Select the ISO speed, then press <

5. Select [OK].

You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto.

1. Select [Auto range].

2. Set [Minimum].

• Select the [Minimum] box, then press <
• Select the ISO speed, then press <

3. Set [Maximum].

• Select the [Maximum] box, then press < >.
• Select the ISO speed, then press < >.

4. Select [OK].

Note

The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (☐)

To prevent shutter speeds from being set too low automatically, you can set the minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto.

This is effective in [P] or [Av] mode when shooting subjects in motion with a wide-angle lens, or when using a telephoto lens. It can also reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.

1. Select [Min. shutter spd.].

2. Set the desired minimum shutter speed.

Auto

- If you select [Auto], turn the dial to set the difference relative to standard speed (toward Slower or Faster), then press the button.

Manual

- If you select [Manual], turn the dial to select the shutter speed, then press the button.

Caution

• If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will be set to obtain the standard exposure. This function will not be applied to flash photography.

Note

- When [Auto (Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to a single stop of the shutter speed.

Uneven exposure and color may appear in continuous shooting at fast shutter speeds under flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights, due to uneven vertical exposure. Anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and colors are less affected by flickering.

1. Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
2. Select [Enable].

1. Take the picture.

Caution

• When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the shutter-release time lag may become longer.
• Flicker at a frequency other than 50 Hz or 60 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced. In [Fv], [P], or [Av] mode, color tone of captured images may vary if the shutter speed changes during continuous shooting or if you take multiple shots of the same scene at different shutter speeds. To avoid inconsistent color tone, shoot in [Fv], [Tv], or [M] mode at a fixed shutter speed. Color tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].
• Shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed may change when you start shooting with AE lock.
• If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the image, flicker may not be properly detected.
• Flicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.
• Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
• Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result may not be obtained even if you use this function.
• Exposure in flash photography may vary.

Note

Taking test shots in advance is recommended. - Detect flicker manually if the screen flickers (as when the light source changes) by pressing the < > button, selecting [Anti-flicker shoot.], then pressing the < > button. - Flicker is not reduced in [ ]mode.

Recommended Tv Setting Manual Setting

Images may be affected by banding if you shoot under light sources that flicker at high frequencies. High-frequency anti-flicker shooting enables you to take pictures at suitable shutter speeds for high-frequency flickering, which minimizes the effect of this flickering on images.

Caution

• Exposure in still photo shooting may vary. Before high-frequency anti-flicker shooting, consider setting [Same expo. for new aperture] to [ISO speed].
• Select a shooting mode ( ).
• Press the < > button to select [Tv] or [M].
• Select [IF anti-flicker shooting] ( , )
• Select [HF anti-flicker shooting].

4. Select [Enable].

5. Select an item.

The camera detects 50.0–8193.7 Hz light sources and displays a suitable shutter speed for shooting under light sources that flicker at high frequencies. You can then switch to the indicated shutter speed.

1. Set the desired shutter speed.

- Set the shutter speed you would prefer to shoot at. For light sources that flicker at high frequencies, the camera will determine a suitable shutter speed near this value.

2. Select [Recommend Tv sett].

3. Select [OK].

It may improve HF flicker detection accuracy to magnify, as much as possible, any areas affected by banding.

4. Switch to the indicated shutter speed.

- Select [Yes] to switch to the indicated shutter speed.

- Selecting [Yes (move to Tv settings)] will display the [Manual setting] screen. Go to step 2 in Manual Setting.

5. Take the picture.

Caution

Shutter speeds displayed will be in a range of 1/50.0–1/8192.0 sec. - Do the following if [No flicker detected] is displayed, or if switching shutter speeds does not eliminate banding.

• Set the recommended Tv setting again.
• Change how the camera is facing, as by rotating it about 90°, then set the recommended Tv setting.
• Try the manual setting option.

HF flicker detection may be less accurate under these conditions.

• Scenes with repetitive patterns (with a lattice or stripes, for example)
• Subjects in constant motion • Extremely bright or dark scenes
• Scenes with multiple light sources
• Scenes with small flashing light sources • Light sources flickering at lower frequencies

Note

- Display of affected movies is not updated if a recommended TV setting is applied for high-frequency flickering during HDMI output of 8K/4K movies.

Check on the screen for image areas affected by light sources that flicker at high frequencies, then find a suitable shutter speed.

1. Select [Manual setting].

2. Adjust the shutter speed.

- Do the following if banding is not eliminated at the shutter speed set by the recommended TV setting.

- Turn the <> dial. With the <> dial, you can increase the shutter speed set by the recommended TV setting ( × 2 , × 3 , × 4 , and so on) or decrease it (1/2×, 1/3×, 1/4×, and so on).

- Turn the < > dial to fine-tune the setting.

- If this does not eliminate banding, change how the camera is facing, as by rotating it about 90°, then set the recommended TV setting.

3. Shoot.

Caution

Shutter speeds you can set manually are in a range of 1/50.0–1/8192.0 sec. - Maximum sync speed in flash photography is limited to 1/181.0 sec. in shutter modes other than [Electronic] In [Electronic] shutter mode, maximum sync speed in flash photography is limited to 1/128.0 sec. The following conditions limit maximum flash sync speed to 1/181.0 sec.

• With RF-S or EF-S lenses attached
• When set to [1.6x (crop)] ( )

Dark lenses may prevent correct display simulation.

- Image display on the screen or in the viewfinder may differ from actual shooting results. Take some test shots in advance.

EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX Series Non-Canon Flash Units Quick Flash Group Control

EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras

Features of EL/EX series Speedlites (sold separately) can be used in flash photography with the camera.

For instructions, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite's Instruction Manual.

Sync speed

Flash sync speeds vary as follows depending on the combination of camera settings.

Camera Setting		Flash Sync Speed
Shutter mode	Cropping/aspect ratio
Mechanical	FULL	1/200 sec.
	1.6R*	1/250 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain	FULL	1/125 sec.
	1.6R*	1/200 sec.
Electronic	FULL	1/160 sec.
	1.6R*	1/250 sec.

* Equivalent to APS-C size

Note

For a faster flash sync speed in [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [Electronic mode, set [Sync speed priority] to [Enable] ().

Flash exposure compensation

You can adjust flash output (flash exposure compensation). With an image displayed on the screen, press the <M button and use a dial to set the amount of flash exposure compensation (You can set the flash exposure compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

FE Lock

This enables you to obtain appropriate flash exposure for a specific part of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, press the camera's < > button, then compose the shot and take the picture.

Caution

Some Speedlites cannot be attached directly to this camera. For details, see Multi-Function Shoe. Setting [Auto Lighting Optimizer] to an option other than [Disable] may still cause images to look bright even if you set lower flash exposure compensation for darker images. - Using high-speed sync may cause banding in images. To reduce the banding, it may help to do the following.

• Move the Speedlite farther from the camera.
• Lower the shutter speed.
• Set [Shutter mode] to [Mechanical].

Note

• The Speedlite will fire an intermittent AF-assist beam as needed, if autofocusing is difficult under low light.
• You can also set flash exposure compensation on the Quick Control screen (or in the [Flash function settings] setting of [External Speedlite control]).
• The camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera is turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that support this feature.
• With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only. Set the camera's shooting mode to [M] or [Av] and adjust the aperture value before shooting.
• When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the manual flash mode.

Sync speed

Sync speed for non-Canon compact flash units varies by shutter mode. Before shooting, confirm that flash sync is performed correctly.

[Shutter mode] Setting	Sync Speed
Mechanical 1/200 sec. or slower
Elec. 1st-curtain 1/250 sec. or slower
Electronic ES	1/160 sec. or slower

With large studio flash units, the flash duration is longer than that of a compact flash unit and varies depending on the model. Before shooting, confirm that flash sync is performed correctly by taking some test shots at a sync speed of approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec.

Sync terminal

• You can use flash units with a sync cord via the sync terminal. The terminal has locking threads to prevent accidental cord detachment. The sync terminal has no polarity. Sync cords can be connected regardless of polarity.

Caution

• Using the camera with a dedicated flash unit or flash accessory for cameras of other manufacturers poses a risk of malfunction and even damage.
• Do not connect flash units with an output voltage of 250 V or more to the camera's sync terminal.
• Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit to the camera's hot shoe. It may not fire.

Note

- You can use one flash unit attached to the camera's hot shoe and another connected to the sync terminal at the same time.

As you view the shooting screen in wireless multi-flash photography, you can configure the settings for each flash group by pressing the button assigned to [Quick flash group control] in [●: Customize buttons for shooting]. This example is based on assigning the button ( ).

1. Set the flash firing mode to < 6 (individual group control) to prepare for wireless multi-flash photography.

- For details, refer to the instruction manuals of flash units supporting wireless multi-flash photography.

1. During standby, press the <Mbutton.

• Settings (flash mode and flash exposure compensation) for each flash group are displayed. Turn the <> dial to select a flash group (A-E) to configure.
• Turn the < > dial to set the flash mode.
• Turn the < > dial to adjust flash output or flash exposure compensation.

Note

The [Quick flash group control] setting screen can be displayed in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] mode. - When Speedlites are set to a flash mode other than < 0 (individual group control), pressing the < 0 button displays the [Flash function settings] screen.

Flash Firing E-TTL Balance E-TTL II Flash Metering Continuous Flash Control Sync Speed Priority Slow Synchro Flash Function Settings Flash Custom Function Settings

√ Clearing Flash Function Settings/Clearing All Speedlite Custom Functions

Functions of EL/EX Series Speedlites compatible with flash function settings can be set via a camera menu screen. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.

For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.

1. Select [External Speedlite control] ().

2. Select an option.

Flash Firing

To enable flash photography, set to [Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist beam of the Speedlite, set to [Disable].

You can set your preferred appearance (balance) for flash shots. This setting enables you to adjust the ratio of ambient light to Speedlite light output.

• Set the balance to [Ambience priority] to lower the proportion of flash output and uses ambient light to produce lifelike shots with a natural mood. Especially useful when shooting dark scenes (indoors, for example). After switching to [P] or [Av] mode, consider setting [Slow synchro] in [☐: External Speedlite control] to [1/*-30sec.auto]*1 and using slow-sync shooting.
• Set the balance to [Flash priority] to make the flash the main source of light. Useful for reducing shadows on subjects and in the background from ambient light.

* 1: The value of "1/*" varies depending on current settings.

Caution

For some scenes, [Ambience priority] may yield the same results as [Standard].

Set to [Eval (FacePrty)] for flash metering suitable for shots of people. Set to [Evaluative] for flash metering that emphasizes firing in continuous shooting. If [Average] is set, the flash exposure will be averaged for the entire metered scene.

Note

- Depending on the scene, flash exposure compensation may be necessary.

Caution

Even when [Eval (FacePrty)] is set, some subjects and shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the expected result.

Set to [E-TTL each shot] to perform flash metering for each shot. - Set to [E-TTL 1st shot] to perform flash metering for only the first shot before continuous shooting. The flash output level for the first shot is applied to all subsequent shots. Useful when prioritizing continuous shooting speed without recomposing shots.

Caution

• Any subject movement in continuous shooting may cause exposure problems. [E-TTL 1st shot] is set when [☐: Shutter mode] is set to [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [Mechanical] in [☐ drive mode.

You can use a faster than normal sync speed in flash photography.

Available when [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II flash metering]. - Flash sync speeds vary as follows when this feature is set to [Enable], depending on the combination of other camera settings.

Camera Setting		Flash Sync Speed (Fastest)
Shutter mode	Cropping/aspect ratio
Elec. 1st-curtain	FULL	1/320 sec.
	1.5*	1/400 sec.
Electronic ES	FULL	1/200 sec.
	1.5*	1/320 sec.

* Equivalent to APS-C size

Note

Also applies with Speedlite 580EX II or later when [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash]. Flash units may not fire at your specified flash output level if the fastest flash sync speed is used with [Flash mode] set to [Manual flash]. Has no effect in [Mechanical] shutter mode. The following Speedlites support [Sync speed priority]: Speedlite 430EX III / 470EX-AI / 600EX II-RT / EL-100 / EL-1 / EL-5 / EL-10, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II / Macro Twin Lite MT-26EX-RT.

Underexposure may occur in some shooting conditions when [Sync speed priority] is set to [Enable].

Suitable exposure may not be obtained with [Sync speed priority] set to [Enable] if receiver Speedlites in radio transmission wireless shooting are set to a positive exposure compensation value.

You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in [P] or [Av] mode. Note that the maximum flash sync speed varies depending on the combination of settings for [Shutter mode] and [Cropping/aspect ratio].

Shutter mode] and [Cropping/aspect ratio].

1/*-30 sec. auto

The shutter speed is set automatically in the following range to suit the brightness. High-speed sync is also possible.

Shutter mode	Cropping/aspect ratio	Shutter Speed
Mechanical	FULL	1/200–30 sec.
	1.5*	1/250–30 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain	FULL	1/250–30 sec.
	1.5*	1/320–30 sec.
Electronic	FULL	1/160–30 sec.
	1.5*	1/250–30 sec.

* Equivalent to APS-C size

1/*-1/60 sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light conditions. Effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. Light from the flash provides standard exposure for subjects, but note that backgrounds may be dark.

1/* sec. (fixed)

Shutter speed is fixed as follows, which is more effective in preventing subject blur and camera shake than with [1/*-1/60 sec. auto]. However, in low light, the subject's background will come out darker than with [1/*-1/60 sec. auto].

Shutter mode		Shutter Speed
Mechanical		1/200 sec.
		1/250 sec.
Elec. 1st-curtain		1/250 sec.
		1/320 sec.
Electronic ES		1/160 sec.
		1/250 sec.

* Equivalent to APS-C size

Caution

High-speed sync is not available in [P] or [Av] mode when set to [1/* sec. (fixed)].

The information displayed on the screen, position of display, and available options vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings, the flash mode, and other factors. For details on the Speedlite's functions, refer to the Speedlite's Instruction Manual.

Sample display

(1) Flash mode (2) Wireless functions / Firing ratio control (RATIO) (3) Flash zoom (flash coverage) (4) Shutter synchronization (5) Flash exposure compensation (6) Flash exposure bracketing

Caution

● Functions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible with flash function settings.

Flash mode

You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash photography.

[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for automatic flash photography.

[Manual flash] is for setting the Speedlite's [Flash output level] yourself.

- Regarding other flash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with the respective flash mode.

Wireless functions

You can use radio or optical wireless transmission to shoot with wireless multiple-flash lighting.

For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with wireless flash photography.

Firing ratio control (RATIO)

With a macro flash, you can set the firing ratio control.

For details on firing ratio control, refer to the Instruction Manual of the macro flash.

Flash zoom (flash coverage)

With Speedlites having a zooming flash head, you can set the flash coverage.

Shutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after the shooting starts.

Set to [Second-curtain synchronization] and use low shutter speeds for natural-looking shots of subject motion trails, such as car headlights.

Set to [High-speed synchronization] for flash photography at higher shutter speeds than the maximum flash sync shutter speed. This is effective when shooting with an open aperture in [Av] mode to blur the background behind subjects outdoors in daylight, for example.

Caution

• When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/40 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set.
• Shutter speed is set to 1/8000 when [☐: Shutter mode] is [Electronic 📋 and [High-speed synchronization] is selected with a shutter speed of 1/8000 sec. or faster.

Flash exposure compensation

Just as exposure compensation is adjustable, you can also adjust flash output.

Note

If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite's setting overrides the camera's.

Flash exposure bracketing

Speedlites equipped with flash exposure bracketing (FEB) can change the external flash output automatically as three shots are taken at once.

For details on the Speedlite's Custom Functions, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite.

1. Select [Flash C.Fn settings].

2. Set the desired functions.

• Select the number.
• Select an option.

Caution

• EX series Speedlites always fire at full output when the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [1:TTL] (autoflash). The Speedlite's Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled from the camera's [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the Speedlite.

1. Select [Clear settings].

2. Select the settings to be cleared.

Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn's]. - Select [OK] on the confirmation screen to clear all flash settings or Custom Function settings.

Picture Style Characteristics Symbols

Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.

In [mode, [ ] (Auto) is set automatically.

1. Select [Picture Style] ( , )
2. Select a Picture Style.

Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.

Note

- If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.

Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. Suitable for most scenes.

Portrait

For smooth skin tones, with slightly less sharpness. Suited for close-up portraits. Skin tone can be adjusted by changing [Color tone] as described in Settings and Effects.

Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes.

Fine Detail

For detailed rendering of fine subject contours and subtle textures. The colors will be slightly vivid.

Neutral

For retouching later on a computer. Makes images subdued, with lower contrast and natural color tones.

Faithful

For retouching later on a computer. Faithfully reproduces the actual colors of subjects as measured in daylight with a color temperature of 5200K. Makes images subdued, with lower contrast.

Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

Caution

- Color images cannot be recovered from JPEG/HEIF images shot with the [Monochrome] Picture Style.

User Def. 1–3

You can add a new style based on presets such as [Portrait] or [Landscape] or a Picture Style file, then adjust it as needed (With any User Defined Picture Style that has not yet been registered, pictures will be taken with the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Standard].

Caution

• [Auto] and the options from [User Def. 1] to [User Def. 3] are not available when [HDR-shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ].
• [Auto] is not available when [Focus bracketing] is set to [Enable]. This also changes [Picture Style] for the options from [User Def. 1] to [User Def. 3] to [Auto].

Icons on the Picture Style selection screen represent [Strength], [Fineness], and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numbers indicate the values for these settings specified for the respective Picture Style.

	Sharpness
		Strength
		Fineness
		Threshold
	Contrast
	Saturation
	Color tone
	Filter effect (Monochrome)
	Toning effect (Monochrome)

Caution

For movie recording, “*,” is indicated for the [Fineness] and [Threshold] parameters of [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] cannot be set for movie recording.

Settings and Effects Monochrome Adjustment

You can customize any Picture Style by changing it from the default settings. For details on customizing [Monochrome], see Monochrome Adjustment.

1. Select [Picture Style] ( , )
2. Select a Picture Style.

- Select the Picture Style to adjust, then press the < > button.

1. Select an option.

• Select an option, then press < For details on settings and effects, see Settings and Effects.

4. Set the effect level.

- Adjust the effect level, then press <

• Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. Any settings you change from default values are displayed in blue.

Note

For movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be set (not displayed). - By selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can restore the parameter settings of the respective Picture Style to the defaults. - To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted Picture Style, then shoot.

	Sharpness
	[AAS8]	Strength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis
	[YWBX]	Fineness*1	1: Fine 5: Grainy
	[2ZYW]	Threshold*2	1: Low 5: High
	Contrast -4: Low contrast +4: High contrast
	Saturation -4: Low saturation +4: High saturation
	Color tone -4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone

* 1: Indicates the edge thinness that enhancement applies to. The smaller the number, the finer the outlines that can be emphasized.

* 2: Contrast threshold between edges and surrounding image areas, which determines edge enhancement. The smaller the number, the more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low. However, noise tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.

Filter effect

Even with the same monochrome image, you can make white clouds, green trees, or other elements stand out more by applying a filter effect.

Filter Sample	Effects
N:None Normal black	-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye:Yellow Blue sky will look more natural, and white clouds will look crisper.
Or:Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more brilliant.
R:Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter.
G:Green	Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look crisper and brighter.

Note

- Increasing [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.

Toning effect

By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in the selected color. Effective when you want to create memorable images.

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1] – [User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with different settings.

Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS software, √) can also be modified here.

1. Select [Picture Style] ( , )
2. Select [User Def.*].

- Select a number from [User Def. 1] to [User Def. 3], then press the < PButton.

1. Press <

With [Picture Style] selected, press <

4. Select a base Picture Style.

• Select the base Picture Style, then press < Also select styles this way when adjusting styles registered to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software).

5. Select an option.

Select an option, then press <

6. Set the effect level.

• Adjust the effect level, then press <. For details, see Picture Style Customization.

• Press the < > button to save the adjusted setting and return to the Picture Style selection screen. The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
• Blue style names in [User Def. *] have been changed from default values.

Caution

• If a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User Defined Picture Style.
• You can restore the default [User Def. *] style and settings by selecting [Basic settings] in [Reset camera].

Note

• To shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *], then shoot.
• For instructions on registering a Picture Style file to the camera, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

[HDR shooting (PQ)] enables you to capture HDR images conforming to the PQ specification (referring to the input signal gamma curve for HDR image display) defined in ITU-R BT.2100 and SMPTE ST.2084.

Note

• Captured as HEIF or RAW images. For optimal viewing, use an HDR display device. - Display varies depending on monitor performance.

1. Select [HDR-shooting (PQ)] ( , ).
2. Select [HDR PQ].

• [W and [] icons are shown on the screen. - For display on the camera screen, images are converted to resemble how they would look on an HDR display device.

Caution

• [HDR PQ] is not available with [☐: Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit]. ● Appearance on HDR and non-HDR display devices may vary.
• Image areas shown in gray in the histogram roughly indicate signal values that are not used. [☐ Display frame rate set.] is automatically set to [Smooth].

Adobe RGB

The range of reproducible colors is called the "color space." For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

In [A⁺] mode, [sRGB] is set automatically.

1. Select [Color space] ().
2. Set a color space option.

- Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then press <

Adobe RGB

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other professional applications. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-compatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.

Note

• File names of still photos shot in the Adobe RGB color space begin with “_”. The ICC profile is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC profile, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).

You can adjust image clarity, as determined by the contrast of image edges.

Set toward the negative end to make images look softer or toward the positive end for a sharper appearance.

1. Select [Clarity] ( , )
2. Set the effect level.

Caution

• Setting clarity may darken or lighten the areas around boundaries in high-contrast images.
• The effect of this setting is not shown in images on the screen in still photo shooting.

Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or contrast is too low or high.

In [Mode, [Standard] is set automatically.

1. Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer] ( , )
2. Set a correction option.

Caution

• Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change, under some shooting conditions.
• If the effect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable]. If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].

Note

- To enable [☐: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to be set even in [M] and [BULB] modes, press the button in step 2 to clear the checkmark [√ for [Disabled in M or B modes].

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.

1. Select [highlight tone priority] ( , )
2. Set an option.

● [Enable]: Improves gradation in highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. ● [Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed highlights even more than [Enable], under some shooting conditions.

Caution

• Noise may increase slightly. The available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be set. With [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.

Note

[Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] and cannot be changed when you set [HDR shooting (PQ)] to [HDR PQ] after pressing the <Q> button to add a checkmark to this setting.

White Balance ☑ [AT Auto White Balance Setting a Color Temperature

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, [Auto White Balance (AWB) provides suitable white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with auto white balance, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

In [mode, [ ] (white balance) is set automatically.

1. Select [White balance] ( , )
2. Select a white balance setting.

Turn the < > dial to make a selection.

Note

For [A] and [ ] setting instructions, see [/ ] Auto White Balance. - To set a suitable white balance for the light source of the shooting location, select [] and turn the <> dial to set an MWB number (). To set a color temperature directly, select [K] and turn the < > dial ( ). - To adjust the current white balance, press the <A> button after selecting the light source, then adjust as needed ( ) - White balance settings cannot be changed while you are pressing the movie shooting button to record a movie. - Movie Exif information will include the white balance setting value at the time recording began.

(Approx.)

Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
AWB	Auto: Ambience priority	3000–7000
AWBW	Auto: White priority
	Daylight 5200
	Shade 7000
	Cloudy, twilight, sunset 6000
	Tungsten light 3200
	White fluorescent light 4000
	When using Flash Automatically set*
	Custom 2000–10000
	Color temperature 2500–10000

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function. Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000K.

White Balance

The human eye adapts to changes in lighting so that white objects look white under all kinds of lighting. Digital cameras determine white from the color temperature of lighting and, based on this, apply image processing to make color tones look natural in your shots.

With [Ambience priority], you can slightly increase the intensity of the image's warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene.

If you select [White priority], you can reduce the intensity of the image's warm color cast.

1. Select [White balance] ( , )
2. With [AWB] selected, press the <INFO> button.

1. Select an option.

Caution

Precautions when set to [White priority]

The warm color cast of subjects may fade. - When multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of the picture may not be reduced. - When using flash, the color tone will be the same as with [Ambience priority).

A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.

1. Access the WB screen.

- Follow steps 1–2 in White Balance.

2. Set the color temperature.

With [K] selected, turn the < > dial to select a color temperature.

- Press < > to exit the setting.

Note

• When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set the white balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.
• When setting [K] to a value measured with a commercially available color temperature meter, take some test shots in advance and adjust the setting as needed to compensate for any difference between the color temperature meter and the camera.

Registering Custom White Balances, Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances, Naming Custom White Balances

With custom white balance, you can set the white balance using an image captured under the same lighting as at the shooting location.

Registering Custom White Balances

To register custom white balances, you can either register a picture taken during this process or register an image recorded on a card.

Note

• Up to five custom white balances can be registered to the camera. Register separate custom white balances for still photos and movies, as needed.

Registering by shooting on-site

Registration from the Quick Control screen

1. Press the < > button.

- Select the [White balance] setting item.

2. Select [Custom].

• Select [*], then press < >. SET

3. Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance data to.

• Turn the < > dial or press < > left or right to select a number from 1 to 5, then press the < > button.

4. Shoot a plain white object (2)

The custom white balance is registered to the camera. To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances.

1. Select [Set Custom WB] ( , )
2. Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance data to.

Press < 0.1

- Turn the < > dial or press < > up or down to select a number for [ ] (from 1 to 5), then press < >. The custom white balance will be registered to the selected number.

1. Select [Record and register WB].

4. Shoot a plain white object (√)

The custom white balance is registered to the camera. To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances.

Registering from an existing image on a card

1. Shoot a plain white object.

- Shoot a plain white object as described in Shooting to register custom white balances.

2. Select [Custom WB] ( , )

3. Select a custom white balance number to register the white balance data to.

• Press <
• Turn the < > dial or press < > up or down to select a number for [▲] (from 1 to 5), then press < > The custom white balance will be registered to the selected number.

4. Select [Select image on card].

Images recorded on the card are displayed.

5. Select an image to register as the custom white balance.

- Turn the < > dial to select the image captured in step 1, then press < ▶>

6. Register the image data as a custom white balance on the camera.

- Select [OK] after the message, and your custom white balance will be registered to the camera.

To shoot with the registered custom white balance, see Selecting and Shooting with Custom White Balances.

Caution

• If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained. The following images cannot be selected.
• Images captured with Picture Style set to [Monochrome]
• Multiple exposures
• Cropped images • Images from other cameras

Shooting to register custom white balances

Note the following when shooting a plain white object to register the color as a custom white balance.

• Your selected number (1) blinks in the upper left of the screen and on the LCD panel. Aim the camera at a plain white object so that white fills the area in (2).
• Set the camera to Manual Focus and shoot so that the white object has standard exposure. You can use any of the white balance settings.

Caution

- Correct white balance may not be obtained if the exposure of your image differs greatly from standard exposure.

Note

If [Correct WB may not be obtained with the selected image] is displayed, try shooting again from step 1. - Instead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray card or standard 18% gray reflector (commercially available). Images captured for this purpose are not recorded to a card.

Setting from the Quick Control screen

1. Press the < > button.

• Select the [White balance] setting item.

2. Select [Custom].

3. Select the custom white balance number.

• Turn the < > dial or press < > left or right to select a number from 1 to 5, then press < >.

4. Take the picture.

Setting from the menu

1. Select [Set Custom WB] ( , )
2. Select the custom white balance number.

(1) Registered image

- On the [Set Custom WB] screen, select the number of the registered custom white balance.

1. Select [Set as white balance].

The white balance setting changes to [*]

4. Take the picture.

The picture is taken with the [*] setting applied.

You can add a name (caption) to the five registered custom white balances (custom white balance nos. 1–5).

1. Select [☐ Get Custom WB] ( , )
2. Select the custom white balance number.

- On the [Set Custom WB] screen, select the number of the registered custom white balance to add a name to.

1. Select [Edit WB name].

4. Enter text.

- Use <>,<>, or<> to select a character, then press <> to enter it.

- By selecting [], you can change the input mode.

To delete single characters, select [] or press the <> button.

5. Exit the setting.

- Press the < > button, then press [OK].

The information is saved, and display returns to the screen in step 2.

The entered name is displayed below [*]

Note

As names, it may be helpful to enter the names of places where you captured the custom white balance images, or the names of the light sources.

White Balance Correction White Balance Auto Bracketing

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter.

White Balance Correction

1. Select [WB Shift/Bkt.] ( , )

2. Set the white balance correction.

Sample setting: A2, G1

• Use < *to move the “■” mark on the screen to your preferred position. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for green. White balance is corrected in the direction you move the mark.
• The direction and amount of correction are indicated in the upper right of the screen.
• Pressing the < ➕ button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
• Press < to exit the setting.

Note

One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)

White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images at once with different color tones.

1. Select [WB Shift/Bkt.] ( , )
2. Set the white balance bracketing amount.

Sample setting: B/A bias, ±3 levels

• Turning the < > dial changes the “■” mark on the screen to “■ ■ ■” (3 points). Turning the dial clockwise sets the B/A bracketing, and turning it counterclockwise sets the M/G bracketing.
• The direction and amount of bracketing are indicated in the upper right of the screen.
• Pressing the < ➕ button will cancel all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
• Press < to exit the setting.

Caution

• During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower. Recording images to the card takes longer than in normal shooting.

Note

The bracketing sequence is (1) Standard white balance, (2) Blue (B) bias, and (3) Amber (A) bias, or (1) Standard white balance, (2) Magenta (M) bias, and (3) Green (G) bias. - You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing. - The white balance icon blinks to indicate that white balance bracketing has been set. - You can change the bracketing sequence (y and number of shots ( ) for the white balance bracketing. - Bracket stands for bracketing.

Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, Focus Breathing Correction, Digital Lens Optimizer, Chromatic Aberration Correction, Diffraction Correction

Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using [Lens aberration correction].

1. Select [Lens aberration correction].
2. Select an option.

3. Select a setting.

• Confirm that the name of the attached lens and [Correction data available] are displayed. If [Correction data not available] or [ ] is displayed, see Digital Lens Optimizer.

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.

Caution

• Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery. The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.

Note

The amount of correction applied will be lower than the maximum correction amount applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software). Peripheral illumination is corrected automatically in [1] mode when correction data is registered on the camera.

Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.

Caution

• To correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the area seen in viewfinder shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the apparent resolution.
• Applying distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly. The amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies.

Note

With RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.

Angle of view fluctuations from changes in focal position during movie recording can be reduced.

This feature can be configured when [Distortion correction] is set to [Enable].

Caution

[Focus breathing correction] is not displayed in still photo shooting. - Applying focus breathing correction will narrow the angle of view. The extent of narrowing depends on shooting conditions. - Test focus breathing correction before use, because the image processing may affect apparent image resolution and noise. - Optimal correction is applied based on the position of the focusing distance range switch on the lens. (The correction is also applied in MF mode.) Focus breathing correction is not applied to any difference between the actual focusing distance and the range of the switch. Movies with abrupt changes to the angle of view may be recorded if you move the focusing distance range switch during recording. Correction artifacts may occur, depending on the lens and shooting conditions. For details on lenses compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website (

Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along with diffraction and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution.

If [Correction data not available] or [✗] is displayed by [Digital Lens Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

Caution

• Image processing after you shoot takes longer when set to [High] (which causes the access lamp to be illuminated longer). ● Maximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes longer.
• Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed before shooting. The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be. For movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is not possible.)
• The effect of Digital Lens Optimizer cannot be checked on the screen at the time of shooting.

Note

With [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [Standard] or [High], [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Diffraction correction] are not displayed, but they are both set to [Enable] for shooting.

Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.

Note

[Chromatic aberration correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Standard] or [High].

Diffraction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.

Caution

• Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction. The higher the ISO speed, the lower the amount of correction will be.

Note

• "Diffraction correction" corrects degraded resolution not only from diffraction but also from the low-pass filter and other factors. Thus, correction is also effective for exposures with the aperture wide open. [Diffraction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Standard] or [High].

Caution

General precautions for lens aberration correction

• Lens aberration correction cannot be applied to existing JPEG/HEIF images.
• When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed. Magnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will not be recorded.
• The amount of correction (except diffraction correction) is less for lenses that do not provide distance information.

Note

General notes for lens aberration correction

Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc. - If the correction is difficult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after shooting is recommended. - Corrections are applied even when an extender or life-size converter is attached. - If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for diffraction correction). - If necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.

Noise such as dots of light or banding that tends to occur in long exposures at shutter speeds of one sec. or slower can be reduced.

1. Select [long exp. noise reduction] ().
2. Set a reduction option.

Auto

For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This setting is effective enough in most cases.

Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all images exposed for 1 sec. or longer. The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the [Auto] setting.

Caution

• With [Auto] or [Enable] set, noise reduction after you shoot may take as long as exposure for the shot. Images may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting. [BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not displayed until processing is finished, when you can shoot again.

You can reduce the image noise generated. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

1. Select [high ISO speed NR] ( , )
2. Set the level.

Low / Standard / High

The camera applies an amount of noise reduction corresponding to your specified level.

Preparation: Dust Delete Data Appending

Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in case sensor cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots automatically.

Preparation

• Use an RF or EF lens. Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper. Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
• Set the lens's focus mode switch to <∞ and set the focus to infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face toward you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
• Select [Dust Delete Data] ().

2. Select [OK].

After the automatic self-cleaning of the image sensor is performed, a message will appear. Although there will be a mechanical sound of the shutter during the cleaning, no picture is taken.

3. Shoot a plain white object.

• Shoot with a plain white object (such as a new sheet of white paper) filling the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm (0.7–1.0 ft.).
• Since the image will not be saved, the data can still be obtained even if there is no card in the camera.

• When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear.
• If the data is not obtained successfully, an error message will appear. Check the information in Preparation, select [OK], and shoot again.

The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from now on. Acquiring Dust Delete Data immediately before shooting is recommended.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.

File size is essentially unaffected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.

Caution

Dust Delete Data is not obtained when RF-S/EF-S lenses are used, or when [ Cropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)]. - Dust Delete Data is not added to images when [Distortion correction] is set to [Enable]. - If the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).

√ Merging Multiple Exposures with a JPEG Image Recorded on the Card √ Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be merged into a single image.

1. Select [Multiple exposure] (icon)
2. Set [Multiple exposure].

• Select an option, then press < ▶. To exit shooting multiple exposures, select [Disable].

On:Func/Ctrl

Convenient when reviewing the results of each multiple exposure as you shoot. Continuous shooting speed is slower with this option.

On:ContShtng

Used for continuous multiple exposures of moving subjects. These operations are not available during continuous shooting: menu screen display, image review after capture, image playback, and undo last image ( )

Note that the single exposures used for merging are discarded, and only the multiple-exposure image is saved.

3. Set [Multi-expos ctrl].

- Select a merging option, then press <

- Additive

The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively. Based on [No. of exposures], set negative exposure compensation. Follow these basic guidelines to set the exposure compensation amount.

Exposure compensation setting guidelines, by number of exposures

Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stops, four exposures: -2 stops

Average

Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. In multiple exposures of the same scene, auto exposure control provides standard exposure behind the subject.

Bright/Dark

Brightness (or darkness) of the base image and added images is compared at the same position, and bright (or dark) portions are retained. Some overlapping colors may be mixed, depending on the relative brightness (or darkness) of the images.

4. Set [No. of exposures].

- Select the number of exposures, then press <

5. Specify the images to save.

• To save all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image, select [All images] and press <
• To save only the multiple-exposure image, select [Result only] and press <

6. Set [Continue Mult-exp].

• Select an option, then press <. With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends. With [Continuously], multiple-exposure shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable].

7. Shoot the first exposure.

• When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the captured image will be displayed. The [icon blinks.
• The number of remaining exposures is indicated on the screen (1) for reference.
• Pressing the < > button enables you to view the captured image (☑).

8. Shoot the next exposures.

Images captured so far are displayed merged. For only image display, press the < > button repeatedly. - Multiple-exposure shooting will end when the set number of exposures are taken.

Note

With [On:Func/Ctrl], you can press the < > button to view the multiple-exposure image so far, and you can delete the previous single exposure ( ). - As shooting information, the multiple-exposure image has information captured for the last shot.

Caution

• Image noise, color shift, or banding may be noticeable in multiple exposures, depending on subjects and shooting conditions.
• With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.
• Multiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to < 2 pF switch batteries or cards.
• Multiple-exposure shooting ends if you set the shooting mode to [A⁺] / [C1] / [C2] / [C3] or switch to movie recording.
• If you connect the camera to a computer, multiple-exposure shooting will not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will end.
• [☐: ☐/☐ Display frame rate set.] is locked on [Smooth] when [Multiple exposure] is set to an option other than [Disable].

Merging Multiple Exposures with a JPEG Image Recorded on the Card

You can select a JPEG image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The selected JPEG image will remain intact.

1. Select [Select image for multi. expo.].

2. Select the first image.

Turn the < > dial to select the first image, then press < >. Select [OK]. The file number of the selected image will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.

3. Take the picture.

- When you select the first image, the number of remaining exposures as set with [No. of exposures] will decrease by 1.

Images you can select

You can select a JPEG image shot at the same angle of view as the first selected JPEG.

Images captured at a full-frame angle of view

Images captured using RF/EF lenses and with [Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [Full-frame]

Images captured at an APS-C angle of view

• Images captured using RF/EF lenses and with [Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1.6x (crop)]
• Images captured using RF-S/EF-S lenses

Caution

The following images cannot be selected.

• RAW or HEIF images • JPEG images in M /S1 sizes • Images from other cameras

- Images with [Cropping/aspect ratio] set to an option other than [Full-frame] or [1.6x (crop)]

Images that cannot be merged may be displayed.

Note

• You can also select a JPEG image used in multiple-exposure shooting.
• Select [Deselect img] to cancel image selection. The color space set for the first image also applies to subsequent images.

Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

To view the multiple-exposure image so far, check exposure, and see how the images are merged, you can press the < > button before you finish shooting your specified number of exposures (when [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, but not with [On:ContShtng]).

Pressing the < > button will display the operations possible during multiple-exposure shooting.

Option Description
Return to previous screen	The screen before you pressed the < >button will reappear.
Undo last image	Deletes the last image you shot (enabling you to replace it by shooting again). The number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.
Save and exit	With [Save source imgs: All images], saves all single exposures and the multiple-exposure image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting. With [Save source imgs: Result only], saves only the multiple-exposure image created so far and exits multiple-exposure shooting.
Exit without saving	Exits the multiple-exposure shooting without saving the image.

Caution

During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure images.

? FAQ

Are there any restrictions on the image quality?

Multiple exposures are captured as JPEG [1] images. Even when [: Image/size] is set to RAW only, these images are captured as JPEG [1] images.

Can I merge images recorded on the card?

With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single exposure from the images recorded on the card (☐). Note that you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.

How are multiple-exposure files numbered?

With the camera set to save all images, multiple-exposure image files are named with the next number after the number of the last single exposure used to create them.

- Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?

During multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off will not take effect. Note that before you start multiple-exposure shooting, auto power off automatically takes effect at the time set in the [Auto power off] option of [#: Power saving], which will cancel multiple-exposure shooting.

Focus bracketing enables continuous shooting with the focal distance changed automatically after each shot. These images enable you to create a single image in focus over a deep depth of field. Compositing is also possible using an application that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).

1. Select [focus bracketing] ().
2. Set [Focus bracketing].

- Select [Enable].

1. Set [Number of shots].

- Specify the number of images captured per shot.

Can be set in a range of [2]–[999].

4. Set [Focus increment].

• Specify how much to shift the focus. This amount is automatically adjusted to suit the aperture value at the time of shooting. Larger aperture values increase the focus shift and make focus bracketing cover a wider range under the same focus increment and number of shots. After completing the settings, press <

5. Set [Exposure smoothing].

• You can compensate for changes in image brightness during focus bracketing by selecting [Enable], so that the camera makes adjustments based on differences between the displayed and actual aperture value (effective f/number), which varies by focal position.
• Select [Disable] if you prefer not to compensate for changes in image brightness during focus bracketing. Use this option for purposes other than depth compositing of the captured images in applications such as DPP.

6. Set [Depth composite].

• Select [Enable] for in-camera depth compositing. Both the depth-composited image and the source images are saved.
• Select [Disable] if you prefer not to perform in-camera depth compositing. Only captured images are saved.

7. Set [Crop depth comp.].

• Select [Enable] for cropping before compositing, to prepare any images without a sufficient angle of view for compositing alignment by cropping them to correct the angle of view.
• Select [Disable] if you prefer not to crop these images. In this case, areas without a sufficient angle of view are covered by a black border in the saved images. You can crop the images manually or edit them as needed.

8. Set [Flash interval].

• Focus bracketing is available with compatible Speedlites, and with non-Canon flash units fired via the sync terminal.
• When set to [0], compatible Speedlites fire and the camera shoots as soon as the Speedlites are fully charged. Refer to the instruction manual of compatible Speedlites for precautions on continuous firing. Consider setting a longer interval when using multiple compatible Speedlites in wireless flash photography. With non-Canon flash units, set a suitable interval time for the flash recharging time and durability. Also refer to Non-Canon Flash Units.

9. Take the picture.

To save your shots in a new folder, tap [and select [OK]. - Focus at the nearer end of your preferred focal range, then press the shutter button completely. Once shooting begins, release the shutter button. - The camera shoots continuously, shifting the focal position toward infinity. - Shooting ends after your specified number of images, or at the far end of the focal range. To cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.

Caution

• For best results, shoot subjects that are not moving. Using a tripod, remote switch (sold separately, or wireless remote control (sold separately, ) is recommended.
• Shooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing, you can crop the image if necessary.
• For details on lenses and flash units compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website (☐) Suitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting may take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to decide a suitable [Focus increment] setting.
• Shooting under flickering light may cause uneven images. In this case, lowering the shutter speed may give better results.
• Focus bracketing is not available when the camera is set to manual focus (☐)
• Canceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last image. Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo Professional. ● Maximum shutter speed with focus bracketing is 1/8000 sec.
• Flash sync shutter speed in focus bracketing is 1/125 sec. (for [Full-frame]) or 1/200 sec. (for [1.6x (crop)]).
• Depth compositing is canceled if you open the battery compartment or card slot cover, or if the remaining battery capacity becomes too low. After cancellation, composited images are not saved.
• Depth compositing may fail for patterned images (with a lattice or stripes, for example) or images that are generally flat and uniform.
• When taking several shots, start by focusing closer, then gradually focus farther away. Too great a distance when moving the focal position between multiple shots may cause unevenness in depth-composited images, or it may cause compositing to fail.
• Depth compositing is intended for subjects that are not moving. For this reason, shooting subjects in motion may prevent effective compositing.
• Depth compositing of images with multiple subjects may fail if your shots are composed with the subjects far apart from each other, for example.
• To cancel depth compositing in progress, press the < > button. Cancellation discards the composited image but keeps all source images.
• In depth compositing, optimal images from the shots are selected and combined by the camera. Not all of the shots are combined to create the composite image.

Note

For best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting. - Details such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined by conditions for the first shot. - [☐: Focus bracketing] reverts to [Disable] when the power switch is set to < >. OFF

Depth compositing image quality setting and images saved

• Composited images are saved as JPEG or HEIF images with Limage quality. RAW composited images are not produced.
• When [Rec options] in [: Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec. separately], source images for both slots are saved with the same image quality as set for the card selected in [Play] in the [: Record func+card/folder sel.] setting.

With this feature, automatic shooting in continuous shooting drive mode is already in progress before you press the shutter button completely, after you have pressed it halfway for a moment. [PRE]s displayed on the shooting screen during pre-continuous shooting.

1. Select [re-cont. shooting] ().
2. Select [Enable].

Caution

• Use cards with 4 GB or more of free space. The shutter-release time lag and continuous shooting interval may vary. The number of shots available may not match the number displayed.
• Subjects may be out of focus if there are sudden changes in the distance between subjects and the camera while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. Images may not be captured correctly when you use pre-continuous shooting with a low battery. ● Shutter speeds slower than [0"5] (0.5 sec.) are not available. In [M] mode, consider shooting with ISO Auto.
• With variable maximum aperture zoom lenses, exposure may change if you zoom while pressing the shutter button halfway or completely. Even with constant maximum aperture zoom lenses, exposure may change if you zoom while pressing the shutter button halfway or completely. For details, refer to the Canon website ( )

Note

The electronic shutter is used in shooting. The amount of preliminary shooting varies depending on the continuous shooting speed. (For example, at a continuous shooting speed of approx. 30 shots/sec., the camera shoots for about 0.5 sec. before you press the button completely.)

With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of shots, so that the camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to your interval until your specified number of shots are taken.

1. Select [Interval timer] ().
2. Select [Enable].

- Select [Enable], then press the < > button.

3. Set the shooting interval and number of shots.

• Select an option to set (hours : minutes : seconds / number of shots).
• Press < to display []. Set the desired number, then press < (Returns to [ .]) Interval

Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].

No. of shots

Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on indefinitely until you stop it, set [00].

4. Select [OK].

The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen.

(1) Interval (2) Number of shots

5. Take the picture.

• First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval timer settings. During interval timer shooting, [TMIEft k.
• After the set number of shots are taken, the interval timer shooting will stop and be automatically canceled.

Note

• Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots in advance is recommended. Even during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next interval timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent operations such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing back images. - If the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots than specified will be taken. Even during interval timer operation, auto power off is triggered after approx. 8 sec. of inactivity, as long as [Auto power off] under [√: Power saving] is not set to [Disable]. - Can also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, and multiple exposures. - To stop interval timer shooting, select [Disable] or set the power switch to < >.

Caution

• Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. In <≥ focus mode, the camera will not shoot unless subjects are in focus. Consider setting the mode to manual focus and focusing manually before shooting.
• If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended.
• Shooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting interval will prevent shooting at the specified interval. For this reason, fewer shots than specified will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as the shooting interval may also reduce the number of shots.
• If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
• When using flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the flash charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the flash from firing.
• Intervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.
• Interval timer shooting is canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the power switch to , switch the shooting mode to [BULB], [C1], [C2], or [C3], switch to movie recording, or use EOS Utility (EOS software). During interval timer shooting, you cannot use Remote Control Shooting or remote-release shooting with a Speedlite.

Disables shutter release sounds, operating sounds, and firing and illumination of the flash and other light sources.

The following settings are used and cannot be changed.

Shutter mode: [Electronic]ES ● Shutter release sound, focused beep: only headphone output - Touch sounds, self-timer sounds: silent Shutter at shutdown: open Long exposure noise reduction: [Disable] Flash firing: [Disable] • AF-assist beam firing: [Disable] Self-timer/remote control lamp: not illuminated

When using lenses equipped with focus preset, consider turning off the focus preset beep.

1. Select [Silent shutter function] ().
2. Select [On].

You can choose the method of shutter release.

1. Select [Shutter mode] ().

2. Select an option.

Mechanical

Shooting activates the mechanical shutter. Recommended when shooting with the aperture of a bright lens wide open.

• Elec. 1st-curtain

Camera vibration blur may be reduced more than with the mechanical shutter, under some shooting conditions.

Flash sync speed can be set higher than with the mechanical shutter.

Electronic ES

Enables reduced sound and vibration from shutter operations, compared to mechanical shutter or electronic first-curtain.

Recommended when shooting with the aperture of a bright lens wide open.

Maximum shutter speed can be set higher than for mechanical shutter or electronic first-curtain.

- A white frame blinks on the screen when you press the shutter button completely.

- Shutter operations are accompanied by beeps. You can disable beeping in [Beep].

Caution

With the camera set to [Elec. 1st-curtain], defocused image areas may be incomplete when you shoot near maximum aperture at high shutter speeds under some shooting conditions. If you dislike the appearance of defocused image areas, shooting as follows may give better results.

• Shoot with an option other than [Elec. 1st-curtain].
• Lower the shutter speed.
• Increase the aperture value.

Setting [☐: Silent shutter function] to [On] sets the shutter mode to [Electronic ESI]. - Zooming during continuous shooting may cause changes in exposure even at the same f/number. For details, refer to the Canon website (√). - Depending on the lens used, consider shooting with [Elec. 1st-curtain] or [Electronic] to ensure effective image stabilization. For details, refer to the lens instruction manual.

Precautions when set to [Electronic ES]

The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the shooting conditions. Images may lack suitable exposure if the aperture value changes in [P] (Program AE), [Tv] (Shutter-priority AE), or [Fv] (Flexible-priority AE) mode. With some lenses and under some shooting conditions, lens focusing and aperture adjustment may be audible. - Bands of light may be displayed and captured images may be affected by light and dark banding if you shoot with electronic shutter during flash firing by other cameras or under fluorescent lighting or other flickering light sources. - Banding may appear in the viewfinder or on the screen if you shoot under flickering light sources.

Set to [Disable] to avoid shooting unless there are cards in the camera.

1. Select [☐ Release shutter without card] (). √
2. Select [Disable].

Focal Length

This menu is displayed for configuration of camera IS mode settings when you are using a non-IS lens. With IS-equipped lenses, setting the lens Image Stabilizer switch to <ON> combines stabilization by the lens and camera.

1. Select [Image Stabilizer mode] ().
2. Select [IS mode].

- Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.

1. Select [Still photo IS].

[Always]: Provides constant image stabilization. [Only for shot]: Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting.

Caution

In some cases, this may not provide sufficient stabilization for certain lenses.

Note

For details on image stabilization for movie recording, see Movie Digital IS.

Focal Length

Image stabilization based on your specified lens focal length is possible by setting the focal length when using lenses that do not support lens communication.

1. Select [Focal length].

2. Set the focal length.

Turn the < > dial to select the digit of the focal length.

- Press < > to display [].

Set the desired number, then press < > (Returns to [ ].) □

3. Select [OK].

Caution

Set [☐: Release shutter w/o lens] to [Enable]. [Disable] prevents image stabilization. ● [Focal length] is not displayed when lenses are attached that support lens communication.

Note

- Focal length can be set in a range of 1–1000 mm (in 1 mm increments).

Quick Control items and the layout are customizable.

1. Select [Customize Quick Controls] ().
2. Select [Edit layout].

1. Select items to remove.

• Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to remove, then press < >.
• Items shown on the Quick Control screen are labeled with a checkmark. Items without a checkmark will be removed.

4. Select items to add.

• Turn the < > dial or use < > to select an item to add, then press < 7. To change the layout, press the < >button.

5. Change the layout.

Use the < > dial to select an item to move, then press < >.

Use the < > dial to move the item, then press < >.

- Press the < > button to exit setup.

6. Select [Save and exit].

7. Review the screen.

- Press the < > button to check the screen with your settings applied.

Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or Clearing All Items

• Select [Reset settings] to restore the default Quick Control screen items and layout.
• Select [Clear all items] to remove all items from the layout, so that no Quick Control screen is displayed when the < □ button is pressed.

Just by tapping the screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically.

1. Enable the Touch Shutter.

Tap [T] in the lower left of the screen. Each time you tap the icon, it will toggle between [ ] and [ ]. • [ ] (Touch Shutter: Enable)

The camera will focus on the spot you tap, then the picture will be taken.

• [ ] (Touch Shutter: Disable)

You can tap a spot to perform focusing on the spot. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

2. Tap the screen to shoot.

Tap the face or subject on the screen. - On the point you tap, the camera focuses (Touch AF) using your specified AF Area. - When [1] is set, the AF point turns green when focus is achieved, then the picture is taken automatically. - If focus is not achieved, the AF point turns orange and the picture cannot be taken. Tap the face or subject on the screen again.

Caution

• The camera shoots in single shooting mode regardless of the drive mode setting ([☐☐], ☐☐☐]).
• Tapping the screen focuses with [One-Shot AF], even if [AF: AF operation] is set to [Servo AF].
• Tapping the screen in magnified view will not focus or take the picture.
• When shooting by tapping with [Review duration] in [Image review] set to [Hold], you can take the next shot by pressing the shutter button halfway or tapping [←].

Note

- To shoot with bulb exposure, tap the screen twice. Tap once to start exposure and again to stop it. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping the screen.

Review Duration

Viewfinder Display

Review Duration

To keep the image displayed immediately after you shoot, set to [Hold], and if you prefer not to have the image displayed, set to [Off].

1. Select [image review] ().
2. Select [Review duration].

1. Set a time option.

Note

- When [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in the [Screen off] option of [Power saving].

Set to [Enable] for viewfinder display of your shots immediately after you shoot.

1. Select [Image review] ().
2. Select [Viewfinder display].

- Select an option.

Note

- [Viewfinder display] settings take effect when [Image review] is set to an option other than [Off].

High-speed display that switches between each shot and the live image is available when shooting in [1] (high-speed continuous shooting) drive mode and in a shutter mode other than electronic shutter.

1. Select [High speed display] ().
2. Select an option.

- Select [Enable] for display that switches between each shot and the live image.

Caution

Images may waver or flicker during high-speed display. This occurs more often at high shutter speeds. However, this does not affect shooting results. - High-speed display is not performed for shutter speeds slower than 1/30 sec., aperture values higher than f/11, conditions that make autofocusing difficult, flash photography, or ISO expansion. It may also stop as you are shooting. ● High-speed display is not available in the following cases.

• With [GVF sim. view assist] set to [On]
• With [Display simulation] set to [Disable] or [Exposure only during

DOF]

You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the duration of exposure value display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such as pressing the shutter button halfway.

1. Select [Metering timer] ().
2. Set a time option.

View Assist Display Conditions View Assist Display Settings

The appearance of images in HDR shooting (with [HDR-shooting (PQ)] or in shooting with custom pictures applied, as shown on the camera screen, viewfinder, or non-HDR display devices connected via HDMI, can be made to resemble the appearance on HDR display devices.

Caution

- Recorded movies will look different from how they appear on the screen.

View Assist Display Conditions

[HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ] [Gamma/Color Space] in [Custom Picture] is set as follows

• Canon Log 2 / C.Gamut
• Canon Log 3 / C.Gamut
• PQ / BT.2020 • HLG / BT.2020

* HLG stands for Hybrid Log-Gamma.

The following gamma/color space is selected in Registering look files, before setting [Look File] to [On]

• HDR PQ(BT.2100) • HDR HLG(BT.2100)
• Select [HIV Log View Assist.] ( , ).

1. Select screen or viewfinder display.

#

Use View Assist display on the screen [ ] and viewfinder [ ].

HDMI

Use view-assisted display on non-HDR display devices connected via HDMI.

3. Select an option.

Screen and viewfinder

On (BT.709 during CP

When the camera is set to [HDR PQ], converted images are displayed that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display device. Image display with a custom picture applied involves basic conversion to a standard gamma/color space.

On (HDR Assist during CP

When the camera is set to [HDR PQ], converted images are displayed that resemble how the images would look on an HDR display device. Image display with a custom picture applied involves conversion so that subjects with intermediate brightness resemble how they would appear on an HDR display device.

[HDMI]

Select [On].

Caution

- Optical viewfinder simulation is used for display when [GVF sim. view assist] is set to [On].

Note

[7. Ass] shown on the information display screen during movie recording with View Assist. View Assist is also used with magnified view. - View Assist display settings do not affect the images captured.

With display simulation, display of image brightness and depth of field more closely matches the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots.

1. Select [☐ display simulation] ().
2. Select an option.

- Exposure+DOF (SIM)

Image brightness and depth of field as displayed closely matches the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly. Similarly, changes to the aperture value will alter the depth of field.

Exposure (ExpSIM)

Image brightness as displayed closely matches the actual brightness (exposure) of your shots. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.

Exposure only during F ( ) Exp.SIM

Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Only when you press and hold the depth-of-field preview button will image brightness resemble actual brightness (exposure) of your shot, and you can check depth of field.

- Disable (OFF)

The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard brightness.

Caution

Notes on [Exposure+DOF]

• Display may flicker at some shutter speeds. With EF lenses, this setting may increase the shutter-release time lag.
• The depth of field shown is only a guideline. For more precise indication of the depth of field, press the depth-of-field preview button.
• [Exposure+DOF] is not available with some lenses. [4] Links if either exposure or depth of field cannot be simulated, or if neither can be simulated. [...] Summed if either exposure or depth of field simulation stops, or if both simulations stop.
• Zooming with certain lenses may change the exposure. For details, refer to the Canon website ( )
• Depth-of-field previewing is canceled when you press the shutter button halfway.

Natural-looking viewfinder and screen display, resembling the view from an optical viewfinder, is available in still photo shooting. Note that images displayed with this feature set to [On] may differ from actual shooting results.

1. Select [OVF sim. view assist] ().
2. Select an option.

Caution

Setting this feature to [On] sets [☐: Display simulation] to [Disable]. Optical viewfinder simulation is used for display when this feature is set to [On] in HDR shooting. ● Optical viewfinder simulation is not used during display to external monitors, including in display to both an external monitor and the camera screen. - Depending on setting screens, optical viewfinder simulation may not be used for display. - Display may not resemble an optical viewfinder in some cases. - Display appearance may change during continuous shooting, with some combinations of drive and shutter modes.

Note

- Not available when the camera is set to shoot multiple exposures.

This display option makes it easier to shoot fast-moving subjects by eliminating the momentary initial lack of viewfinder images (blackout) in continuous shooting.

1. Select [Blackout-free display] ().
2. Select [On].

Caution

- Display may not be smooth in these cases.

• In flash photography
• In magnified view
• Under low light
• With [Multiple exposure] in [☐: Multiple exposure] set to an option other than [Disable]

The screen may flicker during aperture adjustment. The shutter-release time lag may vary. - Has no effect when the following functions are in use.

• Bulb timer
• Long exposures (1 sec. or more)
• Long exposure noise reduction
• Multiple-exposure shooting ([BUSY] appears when you shoot the last exposure in a set)
• Focus bracketing

Setting this feature to [On] locks [☐: Display simulation] to [Exposure+DOF] and [☐OVF sim. view assist] to [Off].

- Blackout stills occur in flash photography or with [Anti-flicker shoot.] set to [Enable].

Shooting Information Display

Customizing Information on the Screen Customizing Information in the Viewfinder Viewfinder Vertical Display Grid Histogram Electronic Level Size Card Free Space (%) Display Lens Information Display Vertical Exposure Level Indicator Clearing Settings

You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the viewfinder when you shoot.

1. Select [☑ hooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Screen info. settings].

1. Select screens.

• Turn the < > dial to select screens of information to show on the camera.
• For information you prefer not to display, press < to clear the checkmark [√]. To edit the screen, press the < > button.

4. Edit the screen.

• Turn the < > dial to select options to show on the screen of information.
• For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark [√].
• Select [OK] to register the setting.
• Select [☑ hooting info. disp.] (). √
• Select [VF info/toggle settings].

1. Select screens.

• Turn the < > dial to select information screens to show in the viewfinder.
• For information you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark [√]. To edit the screen, press the < > button.

4. Edit the screen.

Turn the < > dial to select options to show in the viewfinder. - For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark [√]. - Select [OK] to register the setting.

You can select how viewfinder information is displayed when you are shooting still photos vertically.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [VF vertical display].

On

Information is automatically rotated, making it easier to read.

Off

Information is not automatically rotated.

A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewfinder.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Grid display].

You can select the content and display size of the histogram.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Histogram disp].

1. Select an option.

- Select the content ([Brightness] or [RGB]) and display size ([Large] or [Small]).

You can select the display size of the electronic level.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Electronic level size].

You can display card free space on the screen.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Card free space (\%) display].

1. Select [On].

Note

- During still photo shooting or when writing to cards, the number of available shots is shown instead of the free space.

You can display information about the lens in use.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Lens info display].

1. Select an option.

• Focus distance disp

You can display focus distance when using RF or RF-S lenses. In focus distance display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement.

Focal length disp

You can display the focal length of the lens in use.

SA variable amount

You can display the amount of correction set when using lenses featuring spherical aberration control.

* SA: spherical aberration

You can show or hide the vertical exposure level indicator displayed on the right side of the screen.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Vertical exp level].

1. Select an option.

• When set to [On], the metering value is shown in real time on the vertical exposure level indicator in all shooting modes except [BULB]. Set to [Off] if you prefer not to display the indicator.

Note

The vertical exposure level indicator is shown while the metering timer is active.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Reset].

1. Select [OK].

A mirror image can be displayed when you shoot with the screen rotated toward the subject (toward the front of the camera).

1. Select [Reverse display] ( , )
2. Select an option.

- Select [Off] if you prefer not to reverse display when the screen is facing the subject.

You can set the display frame rate for the shooting screen in still photo shooting. Choose whether to conserve battery power or use a high frame rate for display.

1. Select [☐ Display frame rate set.] ().
2. Select an option.

When set to [Smooth]

- By pressing the < > button to add a checkmark, you can include low-light locations in the scenarios for suppressing lower display frame rates.

Caution

- Shooting under low light with [Suppress lower frame rate] set for shooting screen display may affect performance as follows.

• Faster battery consumption
• Fewer shots available
• Lower image display brightness
• Difficulty in autofocusing
• Lower metering precision
• Lower flicker detection precision
• Lower subject detection precision

You can select how information is presented in the viewfinder.

1. Select [F display format] ( , )
2. Select an option.

You can set the maximum camera body temperature at which the camera automatically turns off. Setting this level higher than the standard temperature can extend the available shooting time by removing some operating restrictions.

1. Select [Auto pwr off temp.] ( , )
2. Select [High].

● [High] sets the maximum temperature higher than the standard setting.

1. Select [OK].

Caution

The camera and memory cards may become hotter when [Auto pwr off temp.] is set to [High].

• We recommend using a tripod or the like to avoid handheld shooting, which may cause problems such as low-temperature contact burns.
• Do not touch CFexpress cards immediately after shooting. Cards may be hot, which may cause burns. Wait until the card has cooled down before removing it.

You can select how the camera determines subject brightness.

In [mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.

Setting from the Quick Control screen

1. Press the < > button (). §10

With an image displayed on the screen, press the < > button.

2. Select the metering mode.

To select an item, turn the < > dial or press < > up or down.

To select the metering mode, turn the <> or <> dial, or press <> left or right.

Setting from the menu

1. Select [Metering mode] ().
2. Select the metering mode.

Evaluative metering

General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

Partial metering

Effective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due to backlight, etc.

Spot metering

Effective when metering a specific part of the subject. The spot metering area is indicated on the screen.

Center-weighted average

The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen weighted more heavily.

Note

• By default, the camera will set the exposure as follows. With [ ] holding down the shutter button halfway locks the exposure value (AE lock) after the camera focuses with One-Shot AF. With [ ] the exposure value is set at the moment the picture is taken (without locking the exposure value when the shutter button is pressed halfway).

With [AE lock meter. mode after focus] (), you can set whether or not to lock the exposure (AE lock) once subjects are in focus with One-Shot AF.

Performs metering for subjects detected based on the [ASubject to detect] setting.

1. Select [Detect priority AE while AF] ( , )
2. Select an option.

• [Enable]: Metering is based on the AF point or AF area where the subject was detected.
• [Disable]: Metering is based on the entire screen.

Caution

In still photo shooting, [Enable] is available only with [☐: Metering mode] set to [Evaluative metering]. - Has no effect during manual focusing (MF).

Note

- Metering is also based on the entire screen when [ASubject to detect] is set to [None].

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], and [M] shooting modes.

For details on exposure compensation when [M] mode and ISO Auto are both set, see M:

Manual Exposure, and for details on [Fv] mode, see Fv: Flexible-Priority AE.

1. Check the exposure.

- Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.

2. Set the compensation amount.

Increased exposure, to brighten images

Decreased exposure, to darken images

Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial. An icon is displayed to indicate exposure compensation.

3. Take the picture.

- To cancel exposure compensation, set the exposure level [ ] to the standard exposure index ([]).

Caution

- If [☐: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (☑) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if decreased exposure compensation is set to darken images.

Note

- The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you set the power switch to < >.OFF

Effect of AE Lock

To keep shooting at the same exposure, such as when you will set the focus and exposure separately, you can press the < > button for AE lock. It is effective for shooting backlit subjects, etc.

1. Focus on the subject.

• Press the shutter button halfway. The exposure value will be displayed.

2.

Press the < > button (). ⓐ8

A [icon] is displayed in the lower left of the screen to indicate that exposure is locked (AE lock). - Each time you press the < > button, the current exposure setting is locked.

3. Recompose and take the picture.

- When you are to take more pictures while maintaining the AE lock, keep holding down the < > button and press the shutter button to take another picture.

Note

AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.

Effect of AE Lock

Metering ModeSelection	AF Point Selection
	Automatic Selection Manual Selection
	Exposure centered on the AF point in focus is locked.	Exposure centered on the selected AF point is locked.
	Center-weighted exposure is locked.

* When [1] is set with the lens's focus mode switch set to < >, center-weighted exposure is locked.

Information Display

General Still Photo Shooting Precautions

Information Display

For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see Information Display.

Note

• White display of the [Exp.SIM] indicates that your shots will be about as bright as the image displayed.
• If the [Exp.SIM] is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image recorded.
• Display simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings. The [Exp.SIM] and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions. No histogram is displayed when [Display simulation] is set to [Disable] or [Exposure only during DOF].

Caution

- Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components.

Image quality

• When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable. Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image.
• Frequent shooting over an extended period may cause high internal temperatures and affect image quality. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
• If you shoot a long exposure while the camera's internal temperature is high, image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before shooting again.

White [ ] or red [ ] internal temperature warning icons

• White [ ] or red [ ] icons indicate high internal camera temperature, caused by factors such as extended shooting or use in hot environments. The white [ ] icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline. Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.
• Shooting at low ISO speeds instead of high speeds is recommended when the white [ ] icon is displayed. The red icon indicates that shooting will soon be terminated automatically. Shooting will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so stop shooting temporarily or turn off the camera and let it cool down a while.
• Shooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white [ ] and red [ ] icons to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
• If the camera's internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with a high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white [ ] icon is displayed.

Shooting results

In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture value will be displayed in orange. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture. Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured with the image area of the normal view.

Images and display

Under low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image. Although noise may be noticeable in images under low light (even at low ISO speeds), there will be less noise in your shots, due to differences in image quality between displayed and captured images. - The screen may flicker if the light source (lighting) changes. In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you will use. - Pointing the camera at different direction may momentarily prevent correct display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting. - If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area. Under low light, bright [Screen brightness] settings may cause noise or irregular colors in images. However, the noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image. - When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more pronounced than in the actual setting.

Lens

- If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch to < >, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of available shots depending on the shooting conditions. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to < >.

- With EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using (super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of 2011.

Note

The field of view is approx. 100% (with image quality set to JPEG). If the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn off automatically after the time set in [Screen off] or [Viewfinder off] under [#: Power saving]. The camera then turns off automatically after the time set in [Auto power off]. Using a commercially available HDMI cable, you can display images on a television (note that no sound will be output).

To prepare for movie recording, set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to < > then press the < > button and choose a recording mode.

☆ to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [ ], [ ] or [ ] mode.

Caution

- When switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera settings again before recording movies.

Note

• You can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still photo shooting. It may take a moment before recording begins. Sizes of movies recorded in [] mode correspond to [] recording sizes. Sizes of movies recorded in modes other than [] correspond to [] recording sizes.

• Tab Menus: Movie Recording - Movie Recording • Movie Recording Size - High Frame Rate • Main Recording Format - Movie Cropping ☆

• Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies) • Sound Recording - Audio Format • Audio Settings - Audio Status - Custom Pictures ☆ - HDR Movie Mode ☆ • Time-Lapse Movies - Movie Self-Timer • Tally Lamp ☆ • Pre-Recording Setting ☆ • Image Stabilizer (IS Mode) - Movie Auto Level - False Color Settings ☆ - Zebra Settings ☆ - Shooting Information Display ☆ - Quick Control Screen ☆ • Standby: Low Resolution ☆ • Canon Log HDMI Output Range ☆ - Metadata ☆ - Time Code - Other Menu Functions • General Movie Recording Precautions

• Image quality/size

(1) Movie rec. size (2) High Frame Rate (3) Main rec. format (4) Movie cropping ☆

(5) Dual shooting (still&movie)

• Sound-rec. settings

(1) Sound recording (2) Audio format (3) Audio settings (4) Audio Status

- Exposure

(1) Exposure comp. ☆ (2) 100 speed settings ☆ (3) HF anti-flicker shooting ☆ (4) 1/8-stop incr. ☆ (5) Auto slow shutter ☆ (6) Detect priority AE while AF ☆

• Color/tone/Dynamic range

(1) Custom Picture (2) Picture Style

• Picture Style Selection ★ • Picture Style Customization ☆ • Picture Style Registration ☆

(3) Clarity ☆ (4) HDR shooting (PQ) ☆ (5) HDR Movie Mode ☆ (6) Auto Lighting Optimizer ☆ (7) Highlight tone priority ☆

• White balance/Quality correction

(1) White balance ☆ (2) Set Custom WB ☆ (3) WB correction ☆ (4) Lens aberration correction ☆ (5) High ISO speed NR ☆

- Various shooting

(1) Pre-recording set. ☆ (2) Time-lapse movie

• Shutter control/Assist shooting

(1) Movie self-timer (2) Tally lamp ☆ (3) IS (Image Stabilizer) mode (4) Auto level (5) Customize Quick Controls (6) Metering timer ☆

- Assist shooting

(1) Metadata ☆ (2) Time code (3) D:\C\Log View Assist. (4) False color set. ☆ (5) Zebra settings ☆

- Assist shooting

(1) Shooting info. disp. ☆ (2) Quick Ctrl screen ☆ (3) VF display format (4) Reverse display

- Assist shooting/HDMI

(1) Auto pwr off temp. (2) Standby: Low res. ☆ (3) Shutdown warning guidance (4) HDMI display (5) HDMI RAW output ☆ (6) HDMI output range for C. Log ☆

Autoexposure Recording Shutter-Priority AE Aperture-Priority AE Scene Icons ISO Speed in [ ]/[ ]_Mode _Av Manual Exposure Recording ISO Speed in []Mode Shutter Speed Still Photo Shooting Information Display (Movie Recording)

Autoexposure Recording

Exposure is controlled automatically to suit the brightness.

1. Set the recording mode to [] or [].

- Press the < > button, then turn the < > dial to select [] or []

2. Focus on the subject.

Before recording a movie, focus with AF (or manual focus). The camera focuses continuously under default settings, with [Movie Servo AF] in [AF: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable]. - By default, pressing the < > button focuses using your specified AF area. - By default, pressing the shutter button halfway starts metering.

3. Record the movie.

- Press the movie shooting button to start recording a movie. You can also start recording a movie by tapping [●] on the screen.

While the movie is being recorded, [REC] (1) is displayed, the screen is outlined in red, and the tally lamp is lit.

(2)

Sound is recorded by the microphone (2). - To stop recording the movie, press the movie shooting button again. You can also stop recording a movie by tapping [■] on the screen.

Recording mode enables you to set your preferred shutter speed for movies. ISO speed and aperture values are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure.

1. Set the recording mode to [ ]

(1)

Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the < > dial. Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate.

3. Focus and record the movie.

- Same as steps 2 and 3 for Auto Exposure Recording.

Caution

• Avoid adjusting shutter speed while recording movies, which will record changes in exposure.
• When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the subject's movement will look.
• If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

[1] recording mode enables you to set your preferred aperture value for movies. ISO speed and shutter speed are set automatically to suit the brightness and obtain standard exposure.

1. Set the recording mode to [Av].

- Press the <A> button, then turn the <> dial to select [Av].

2. Set the aperture value (1).

(1)

Set it by looking at the screen as you turn the <> dial.

3. Focus and record the movie.

Same as steps 2 and 3 for /AurExposure Recording.

Caution

- Avoid adjusting the aperture value while recording movies, which will record changes in exposure caused by aperture adjustment.

Note

Notes for [A], [B] and [C] modes Av

• You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <> button (except in [] mode). After applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the <> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <> button.)
• Exposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops by turning the <> dial (except in [] mode). In [1] and [] mode, the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value are not recorded in movie Exif information. The camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED light automatically under low light when recording movies in [1, 2], [3] and [4] modes. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the EX series Speedlite equipped with an LED light.

In [ ] recording mode, the camera detects the type of scene and sets all settings accordingly. The detected scene type is indicated in the upper left of the screen. For icon details, see Scene Icons.

ISO speed is set automatically. See ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in movie recording.

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed for movie recording.

1. Set the recording mode to [x]^M

- Press the < A button, then turn the <> dial to select [].

2. Set the shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed.

(1) (2) (3)

• Press the shutter button halfway and check the exposure level indicator.
• Turn the < > dial to set the shutter speed (1), the < > dial to set the aperture value (2), and the < > dial to set the ISO speed (3). Available shutter speeds vary by frame rate (

3. Focus and record the movie.

- Same as steps 2 and 3 for / Autoexposure Recording.

Caution

ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50) in movie recording. During movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed, aperture value, or ISO speed, which may record changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO speeds. - When recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25 sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less smooth the subject's movement will look. - If you change the shutter speed while recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, image flicker may be recorded.

Note

• Exposure compensation with ISO Auto can be set in a range of ±3 stops.
• When ISO Auto is set, you can press the < > button to lock the ISO speed. After locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the < > button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the < > button.)
• If you press the < > button and recompose the shot, you can see the exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (☑) compared to when the < > button was pressed.

You can set the ISO speed manually or select [Auto] to set it automatically. For details on ISO speed, see ISO speed (recommended exposure index) in movie recording.

Available shutter speeds in [] and [] mode vary depending on the frame rate of your specified movie recording quality.

Frame Rate	Shutter Speed (Sec.)
	Normal Movie Recording High	Frame Rate Movie Recording
239.8P	- 1/250–1/8000
119.9P	-	1/125–1/8000
100.0P		1/100–1/8000
59.94P	1/8–1/8000 –
50.00P
29.97P
25.00P
24.00P
23.98P

If you will shoot still photos while recording movies, set up [natural shooting (still&movie)]. After this, shoot still photos as you would normally do.

For details on the icons on the movie recording screen, see Information Display.

Caution

The remaining time displayed for movie recording is only a guideline. - Movie recording may stop before the initially displayed recording time elapses if the red [T] icon appears due to high internal camera temperature during recording (2)

8K/4K Movie Recording Image Area Frame Rate (fps: frames per second) Compression Method Cards That Can Record Movies Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

You can set the resolution, frame rate, and compression method in [Movie rec. size]. Note that the frame rate is updated automatically to match the [System frequency] setting (

1. Select [Movie rec. size] ().
2. Set the item.

Turn the < > dial to select a tab (1). - Press < > vertically or horizontally to change the setting (2). - When finished, press < A .

Available resolutions

Resolution Image Size Aspect Ratio Restrictions
	8192×4320 Approx. 17:9		• Available when [Main rec. format] is set to [XF-HEVC S].• 8K recording is not available when [High Frame Rate] or [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable], or with RF-S or EF-S lenses.
	7680×4320 16:9
[KK0Y]	4096×2160 Approx. 17:9		• Fine options have higher image quality and lower compression.• Fine recording is not available when [High Frame Rate] or [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable], or with RF-S or EF-S lenses.
[CBCA]	3840×2160 16:9
[SKS2]	2048×1080 Approx. 17:9
	1920×1080 16:9

With [Main rec. format] set to [RAW] ()

You can set the resolution, frame rate, and type of RAW for RAW movie output. The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.

System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate Type of RAW
54.94 Hz: NTSC	RAW	8192×4320	59.94P	RAW
			29.97P 24.0KP 23.98P	RAW RAW
50.00 Hz: PAL			50.0KP	RAW
			25.00P 24.00P	RAW RAW
54.94 Hz: NTSC	RAW	4096×2160	59.94P 29.97P 24.0KP23.98P	RAW RAW
50.00 Hz: PAL			50.0KP 25.0KP 24.0KP

Caution

• If you change the [System frequency] setting, also set [Movie rec. size] again. Other devices may not play movies such as 8K/4K, 59.94 or 51.00 Frame Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
• Apparent resolution and noise vary slightly depending on the movie recording size, cropped recording setting, and lens used.

Note

To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera before recording movies is recommended (2). Movies cannot be recorded in HD or VGA quality.

With [HDMI RAW output] set to [On] ()

HDMI

You can set the resolution, frame rate, and type of RAW for HDMI RAW movie output. The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.

System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate Type of RAW
54.94 Hz: NTSC		8192×4320		RAW
50.00 Hz: PAL
54.94 Hz: NTSC		4096×2160
50.00 Hz: PAL

2

You can set the compression method of movies recorded to card at the same time. The movie recording format is [XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit], and the frame rate corresponds to the frame rate setting for HDMI RAW movie output.

The following combinations of movie recording quality options are available.

System Frequency Resolution Image Size Frame Rate				Compression Method
54.94 Hz: NTSC		2048×1080
50.00 Hz: PAL

Caution

• If you change the [System frequency] setting, also set [Movie rec. size] again. Other devices may not play movies such as 8K/4K/2K, FMD, 69.91gh50.00P Frame Rate movies normally, because playback is processing-intensive.
• Apparent resolution and noise vary slightly depending on the movie recording size, cropped recording setting, and lens used.

Note

• To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera before recording movies is recommended. Movies cannot be recorded in HD or VGA quality.

8K/4K Movie Recording

Recording 8K or 4K movies requires a stable card with a fast writing speed. For details, see Cards That Can Record Movies. - 8K/4K movie recording greatly increases the processing load, which may increase the internal camera temperature faster or higher than for regular movies. Display of [ ] white [ ] or red [ ] icons during movie recording warns that cards may be hot, so if you need to remove them, stop recording for a while before removal, and do not remove them immediately. - From a 8K or 4K movie, you can select any frame to save to the card as a JPEG still image. HDMI video output of 8K movies results in 4K movies.

The movie image area varies depending on factors such as movie recording quality and cropped shooting settings and the lens used.

RF or EF lenses: With [ : movie cropping] set to [Disable]

(1) (8K RAW) (2048×1080)

(8192×4320)/

(4K RAW (4096×2160) 4K-D Fine 4K-D

2K·D Fine 2K·D

(2) 80×4320 / (3840×2160) / (1920×1080) FHD Fine FHD

RF or EF lenses: With [ : movie cropping] set to [Enable]

RF-S or EF-S lenses

(3) (4096×2160) / (2048×1080)

(4) (3840×2160) / (1920×1080)

Caution

- Recording with Movie digital IS ( ) further crops the image around the center of the screen.

239.8P: 239.76 fps / 115.49.88 fps / : 59.92.4fps / : 29.97 f25.97P For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). 200.0P: 200.00 fps / FOL.07.00 fps / : 50.00 fps / : 25.00 f25.00P For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.). 24.00P: 24.00 fps / 23.28P 98 fps Mainly for cinematic purposes. 27:46198 fps) is available when [ : System frequency] is set to [59.94Hz:NTSC].

Intra: High (Intra-frame)

Compresses each frame, one at a time, for recording. Although file sizes are larger than with Long GOP, movies are more suitable for editing. Available when [Main rec. format] is set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit].

Intra: Standard (Intra-frame)

Because file sizes are smaller than with [movie recording over longer periods is possible with a card of the same capacity. Available when the resolution is set to 8K-D/8K-U or when [main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit].

Intra Light (Intra-frame)

Enables smaller file sizes than with [Inbe cause movies are recorded at lower bit rates, and these movies can be played on more devices. This offers a longer available recording time than [Inwith a card of the same capacity. Available when the resolution is set to 8K/D/8RU when [: Mdn rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit].

LGOP: Standard (Long GOP) / LGOP (Long GOP)

Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Because file sizes are smaller than with intra-frame, movie recording over longer periods is possible with a card of the same capacity.

For details on cards that can record movies, see Cards That Can Record Movies.

See Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size, and card performance requirements for details on SD cards.

Test cards by recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your specified size (y)

Caution

Before recording 8K or 4K movies, format cards by selecting [Low level format] in [Format card]. If you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading speed, the movie may not be played back properly. When recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed sufficiently higher than the bit rate. When movies cannot be recorded properly, format the card and try again. If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card manufacturer's website, etc. Recording to SD cards may not be possible, depending on the movie recording size. Pressing the movie shooting button will not start recording. For details, see Specifications.

Note

To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera before recording movies is recommended. To check the card's writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer's website, etc.

• Individual movie files exceeding 4 GB cannot be recorded to SD cards. With SDHC cards, once the movie file size reaches 4 GB, a new movie file is created automatically. During playback, these files are automatically played consecutively.
• With CFexpress or SDXC cards, individual movies are recorded as a single file, even if they exceed 4 GB.

Caution

• When importing movie files exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS Utility or a card reader. It may not be possible to save movie files exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer's operating system.
• Multiple files are displayed for any single movie file exceeding 4 GB that you transfer from an SDHC card to a computer. Deleting the first file will prevent playback of the remaining movie files.
• When connecting to a computer with an interface cable, do not use the computer to delete movie files on the camera. Movie files may not be recognized correctly.

See Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size, and card performance requirements.

When set to [Enable], the camera can capture 239.76/200.00 fps or 119.88/100.00 fps to record movie files with a frame rate of 29.97/25.00 fps.

The maximum recording time per movie is 89 min. 29 sec. Sound is not recorded. Note that playback is in slow motion. 239.8P/203.0 available at resolutions of /. 2K-D FHD The compression method is LGOP Count-up of time code display during movie recording is based on 29.97/25.00 fps.

Caution

Time codes are not recorded when [Count up] is set to [Free run] in [Time code] (√) - Check the [☐: Movie rec. size] setting if you return this setting to [Disable]. - The screen may flicker if you record High Frame Rate movies under fluorescent or LED lighting. For a moment when you start or stop recording High Frame Rate movies, the movie is not updated, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when recording movies to external devices via HDMI. - Movie frame rates shown on the screen as you record High Frame Rate movies do not correspond to the frame rate of the movie recorded. ● Headphones cannot be used (no sound is audible). The frame rate of HDMI video output is 59.94 fps or 50.00 fps. The camera's internal temperature may rise and less recording time may be available after extended movie playback or image display. - Movie digital IS may not provide sufficient stabilization when a macro lens is used to shoot subjects near the closest focusing distance.

XF-HEVC S and XF-AVC S Movies RAW Movies Recording Proxy Movies

You can specify the format of movie files recorded.

1. Select [ ] main rec. format] ().
2. Select an option.

XF-HEVC S and XF-AVC S movies are in original Canon video formats that are extensions of H.265/HEVC and MPEG-4 AVC/H.264, respectively. These formats maintain image quality while offering high data compression.

Main Recording Format	Codec	Brightness, Hue, Saturation (YCbCr)/Color Depth	Description Restrictions
XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit	H.265/ HEVC	4:2:2/10-bit	XF-HEVC S can be used to record 10-bit YCC 4:2:2 signals.It is assumed that this material will be edited on a computer.	May not be played back correctly by some software.
XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit	H.265/ HEVC	4:2:0/10-bit	XF-HEVC S can be used to record 10-bit YCC 4:2:0 signals.	-
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit	MPEG-4 AVC/H.264	4:2:0/8-bit	XF-AVC S can be used to record 8-bit YCC 4:2:0 signals.A recording format with wide playback compatibility in software.	Not available with [hair: HDR shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ].
XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit	MPEG-4 AVC/H.264	4:2:2/10-bit	XF-AVC S can be used to record 10-bit YCC 4:2:2 signals.It is assumed that this material will be edited on a computer.	May not be played back correctly by some software.

Note

- Consider selecting a 10-bit recording format for custom picture files with a color space set to [C.Gamut] or [BT.2020] (3).

RAW movies consist of raw data from the image sensor in a digital form.

You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to view and process RAW movies.

For details, refer to the Digital Photo Professional instruction manual.

Caution

RAW movies cannot be processed with [:RAW image processing]. [RAW] is not available in these cases.

• [Digital IS] in [☐: IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to an option other than [Off] • [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable]
• [ dual shooting (still&movie)] is set to [On]
• The camera is connected by USB after you have selected [Video calls/streaming] in [√: Choose USB connection app]
• With RF-S or EF-S lenses attached
• RAW movie playback may cause the camera to become hot internally, which may cause movie playback to stop automatically.
• Consider using two cards when you record RAW movies, so that you can also record a proxy movie and use it for playback.
• Set ['Rec options] in [√: Record func+card/folder sel.] to [1 Main 2 Proxy] and ['Ray] to [ ]. 2

Note

• To display RAW movies on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, hereafter DPP) is recommended. RAW images from this camera cannot be used with older versions of DPP. Download the latest version of DPP from the Canon website and install it, which will overwrite the previous version (☐)
• Commercially available software may not be able to display RAW movies recorded by this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software manufacturer.
• To prioritize gradation in highlights, consider setting [CP function] in [Custom Picture] to [On].

To record one version of movies to card ① in the main recording format while recording another version to card ② in a lighter format, set [Rec options] in [: Record func +card/folder sel.] to [① Main ② Proxy]. This is referred to as “proxy movie recording.” [: Main rec. format] settings apply to card ③ where main movies are recorded. For the recording settings used to record proxy movies to card ②, the following items are set automatically based on card settings.

Recording Format Resolution Frame Rate

Main movie settings correspond to the following, automatically configured proxy movie settings.

Main Movie Settings Proxy Movie Settings (Set Automatically)
Recording Format Image	Size Recording	Format Image Size
XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bitXF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit	4096×21602048×1080	XF-HEVC S YCC420 10bit	2048×1080
	3840×21601920×1080		1920×1080
XF-AVC S YCC420 8bitXF-AVC S YCC422 10bit	4096×21602048×1080	XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit	2048×1080
	3840×21601920×1080		1920×1080
RAW	8192×43204096×2160	XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit 2048×1080

* Proxy movie frame rates match main movie frame rates. * Frame rates cannot be set higher than 100 fps. * Among proxy movie compression methods, only for bit rate, you can choose a [Compression] option ([LGOP: Standard (Long GOP) 16 Mbps] or [LGOP Light (Long GOP) 9 Mbps]) for [2] below [Movie rec. size].

Caution

• Recording proxy movies takes as much time as recording main movies. When recording stops for a main movie, recording also stops for the proxy movie. However, main movie recording continues even if errors stop proxy movie recording.

- Icons on the movie recording screen indicate whether recording is possible for main and proxy movies.

Main movie: 1 recording possible), (recording not possible)

Proxy movie: 2 recording possible), (recording not possible)

- Gradation of the sky, white walls, or similar image areas may not be reproduced smoothly in proxy movies under some shooting conditions.

Note

- On the movie recording screen, the amount of time remaining for movie recording refers to the time for main movies. If card (for main movies) is not in the camera, the amount of time remaining for movie recording refers to the time for card (proxy movies).

With RF or EF lenses, you can record movies cropped around the center of the image area, as if captured with a telephoto lens.

Recording movies with RF-S/EF-S lenses has the same effect as this movie cropping feature.

1. Select [☐: Movie cropping] (☐)
2. Select [Enable].

Caution

The center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the recording area, when [Digital IS] in [IS (Image Stabilizer) mode] is set to [On] or [Enhanced].

Note

• The recording area available with movie cropping is the same as when recording movies with RF-S/EF-S lenses. For details on the recording area, see Image Area.

Without interrupting movie recording, you can shoot still photos (single shooting or continuous shooting) by pressing the shutter button completely. This enables still photo shooting with higher image quality than extracting frames from movies.

Caution

• When using this feature, make sure two cards are in the camera before turning it on. Having only one card in the camera when you turn it on will prevent both movie recording and still photo shooting.
• To record movies with only one card inserted, switch to still photo shooting mode and press the movie shooting button. [1] settings are applied in movie recording.

Note

Movies are recorded in Full HD image quality (1920×1080). Still photos are captured as JPEGs with an aspect ratio of 16:9 (7680×4320). Movies are recorded to card and still photos to card.

1. Select [☐ dual shooting (still&movie)] ().
2. Select [Dual shooting (still&movie)].

3. Select [On].

4. Set other options as needed.

Drive mode

- Specify the amount of still photo shooting performed by pressing the shutter button completely. Turn the < > dial to make a selection.

High speed

• With [System frequency] set to [59.94Hz:NTSC]: Continuous shooting at up to approx. 7.5 shots/sec. while pressed
• With [System frequency] set to [50.00Hz:PAL]: Continuous shooting at up to approx. 6.2 shots/sec. while pressed

Low speed

• With [System frequency] set to [59.94Hz:NTSC]: Continuous shooting at up to approx. 5 shots/sec. while pressed
• With [System frequency] set to [50.00Hz:PAL]: Continuous shooting at up to approx. 4.1 shots/sec. while pressed

Single shooting

Single-image shooting

JPEG quality

- Set the level of image quality (1–10) in still photo shooting. Turn the < > dial to make a selection.

● Higher numbers offer higher quality (lower compression).

Caution

• Still photos cannot be captured during movie recording when RF-S or EF-S lenses are attached.
• Faces in still photos may appear dark, or colors may look different from those in normal still photo shooting, because settings for movie recording are used for autofocus, exposure, and white balance. The shutter-release time lag for single shooting of still photos may be longer under the following shooting conditions. Continuous shooting is also slower.

- Shooting under low light with [Auto slow shutter] set to [Enable]

• Using a slow shutter speed in [Tv] or [M] mode

- Setting [💡: Standby: Low res.] to [On] and only shooting still photos

● Still photos cannot be transferred during movie recording. Some features are not available with [fual shooting (still&movie)] set to [On]. Some limitations also apply to movie recording sizes and anti-flicker shooting. Magnification from the point in focus is not available for still photos captured with this feature. Similarly, in-camera resizing, cropping, and upscaling are not available.

Note

• You can extend the time available for movie recording by setting [Standby: Low res.] to [On].
• As the Picture Style for still photos, the setting of [Picture Style] during movie recording is applied.

Select [On] for sound recording during movie recording. The built-in microphone is used unless an external microphone is connected.

1. Select [Sound recording] ().
2. Select an option.

- Set the recording level and other settings as needed in [Audio settings] (J)

[Audio settings] is not available in [] mode. Here, the sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

Caution

• Sounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication function is not recommended.
• Make sure any output plugs of external microphones or any headphone jacks are fully inserted in the camera. The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera or lens is operated during movie recording. If so, it may help reduce these sounds if you use an external microphone equipped with an output plug and position it away from the camera and lens.
• Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera's external microphone IN terminal. Sound that is recorded using four-channel recording may not be played correctly by some software.

Note

• Audio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI, except when set to [Disable]. In case of feedback from television audio output, move the camera away from the television or turn down the volume. The volume balance between L/R (left/right) cannot be adjusted. Sound is recorded at a 48 kHz sampling rate.

Four-channel recording

The camera supports four-channel sound recording.

Four-channel recording can include combinations of the following sources.

• Microphone designed for a multi-function shoe (2 channels) + external microphone (2 channels)
• Microphone designed for a multi-function shoe (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2 channels) ● External microphone (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2 channels) Built-in microphone (2 channels) + built-in microphone (2 channels)

When multiple microphones are connected, the one with higher priority is assigned to channels 1 and 2, and the lower-priority one is assigned to channels 3 and 4. Microphones have the following priority, from highest to lowest.

• Microphones designed for a multi-function shoe External microphones Built-in microphone

Caution

• Four-channel sound recording (with multiple microphones) is available with [Audio format] set to [LPCM/24bit/4CH]. Setting [Audio format] to [AAC/16bit/2CH] restricts sound recording to two channels (with a single microphone).

- Movie files recorded with [LPCM/24bit/4CH] selected may not be played correctly by some software.

Note

- To check which microphone input is currently enabled, access [Audio Status] (☑).

You can choose the audio format used for sound in movie recording.

1. Select [Audio format] ().
2. Select an option.

When set to [Main Proxy]

- When ['rec options] in [: Record func+card/folder sel.] is set to [1 Main Proxy], select the audio format for each card.

Caution

The audio format of HDMI output when [HDMI RAW output] is set to [On] is locked to [LPCM/16bit/2CH]. The setting on card cannot be changed when card is set to [AAC/16bit/2CH]. - Selecting [LPCM/24bit/4CH] enables four-channel sound recording (with multiple microphones). Selecting [AAC/16bit/2CH] restricts recording to two channels (with a single microphone). Sound that is recorded using four-channel recording may not be played correctly by some software.

Recording Mode Recording Level Wind Filter Attenuator Microphone Directionality

Configure microphones for sound recording in these settings. When using microphones that are external or designed for a multi-function shoe, also refer to the microphone instruction manual.

1. Select [Audio settings] ().
2. Select the device to use.

Built-in microphone

For configuring settings for the built-in microphone.

External microphone

For configuring settings for external microphones that use the external microphone IN terminal.

Hot shoe input

For configuring settings for microphones designed for a multi-function shoe.

3. Set the item.

When set to [Built-in microphone]

When set to [External microphone]

When set to [Hot shoe input]

● Available setting items vary depending on the microphone used.

Auto

The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will take effect automatically in response to the sound level.

Manual

You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed. Adjust the level in [Rec. level].

Caution

- Do not change the [Recording mode] settings when listening with headphones. This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your ears.

Note

Recording levels are shown in the level meter at the bottom of the screen.

Available when [Recording mode] is set to [Manual].

To adjust the sound-recording level, turn the < > dial while watching the level meter. Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the "12" (-12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds "0", the sound will be distorted.

Available when using the built-in microphone or multi-function shoe microphones that are compatible with wind filters.

Set to [Enable] to reduce wind noise when there is wind outdoors. When the wind filter function takes effect, part of the low bass sounds will also be reduced.

Attenuator

As a function that suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises during recording, the attenuator can be enabled or disabled when using microphones designed for a multifunction shoe. For details, refer to the microphone instruction manual.

Available when using multi-function shoe microphones for which directivity can be switched. For details, refer to the microphone instruction manual.

Indicates audio status such as the active microphone and the headphone volume.

1. Select [Audio Status] ().
2. Check the details as needed.

Note

[Monitor CH] indicates channels set in [Shoot. monitor CH] for [Headphones] in [Audio monitor].

Selecting Custom Picture Files Editing Custom Pictures Custom Picture Setting Items √ Checking Custom Picture Settings Saving and Loading Custom Picture Files Using Look Files Canon Log Image Quality

Custom picture files on the camera enable you to adjust color tones in movie recording by applying a combination of settings (gamma/color space, color matrix, and look files), mainly in preparation for post-production processing.

• You can select a custom picture file to record movies with your preferred image characteristics.
• Preset custom picture files can be edited to create new ones. To adjust movie color tones, you can register look files.

Caution

- Applying custom pictures may change the metering level.

1. Select [Custom Picture] ().
2. Select [Function].

1. Select [On].

1. Select [Select CPIe].

5. Select a custom picture file.

Custom Picture File	Gamma/Color Space	Look File	Color Matrix	Summary
C1: Canon 709	Canon 709 / BT.709	Off Neutral		Wider dynamic range than BT.709 StandardSuitable for display on BT.709 compliant-monitorsAlso suitable without post-processing
C2: Canon Log 2	Canon Log 2 / C.Gamut	Off Neutral		Uses Canon Log 2 gamma; post-processing requiredSuperior tonality in dark image areas than Canon Log 3
C3: Canon Log 3	Canon Log 3 / C.Gamut	Off Neutral		Uses Canon Log 3 gamma; post-processing requiredRetains Canon Log characteristics while expanding the dynamic range
C4: PQ PQ / BT.2020 Off Neutral				Uses an HDR gamma curve compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ) standard)
C5: HLG HLG / BT.2020 Off Neutral				Uses an HDR gamma curve compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG) standard)
C6: BT.709 Standard	BT.709Standard / BT.709	Off Video		Suitable for display on BT.709 compliant-monitorsUses a gamma curve compliant with the ITU-R BT.709 standard
C7 to C20 (User07 to User20)	Canon 709 / BT.709	Off Neutral		Wider dynamic range than BT.709 StandardSuitable for display on BT.709 compliant-monitorsAlso suitable without post-processing

You can edit settings of the selected custom picture file.

1. Select [Edit CPILE].

- To edit a protected ([+] custom picture file, select [Unprotect] by [Protect] to enable editing.

2. Edit the settings as needed.

• Select a setting to edit, then adjust it on the screen displayed ( )
• To save an edited custom picture file with a new name, select [Rename] and enter a name.
• To reset editing, select [Reset], then select the custom picture file to reset. For instructions on look files, see Using Look Files.

3. Protect the image.

- When you are finished editing, select [Protect].

The following items can be set by using [Edit CPIe].

Setting Item Description
Gamma/Color SpaceSet the combination of gamma curve and color space
Gamma	(1) Output(2) Input(2)(2)
	Canon Log 2	Gamma with richer gradation in dark image areas than Canon Log 3Requires image processing in post-production
	Canon Log 3	Gamma that retains Canon Log characteristics but with expanded dynamic rangeRequires image processing in post-production
	PQ	HDR gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100 (PQ) standard)
	HLG	HDR gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG) standard (in 8-bit recording, equivalent to the ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG) standard)
	BT.709 Standard	Gamma compliant with the ITU-R BT.709 standardSuitable for display on BT.709 compliant-monitors
	Canon 709	Gamma with a wide dynamic range that is also suitable without post-processingSuitable for viewing on BT.709 compliant-monitors
Color space	C.Gamut	Color space developed by Canon based on image sensor characteristics, covering a wider color gamut than that of BT.2020Also recommended when converting to the ACES2065-1 color space
	BT.2020	Color space compliant with the ITU-R BT.2020 standard for UHDTV (4K/8K)
	BT.709	Standard color space compliant with sRGB standards
Color MatrixColor reproduction setting
Neutral Faithful color reproduction
Production Camera Cinematic color reproduction
Video Color reproduction with a contrast for broadcast TV
Look FileUse of look files
On Enables color adjustment based on look files
Off Disables color adjustment based on look files
Look File SetupLook file registration/removal
Register		Registers look files (.cube format) to custom pictures
Delete Removes look files registered to custom pictures
HLG ColorHybrid log-gamma (HLG) color settingAvailable when the [Gamma/Color Space] gamma is set to [HLG] and color space is [BT.2020]
BT.2100 Color equivalent to ITU-R BT.2100
Vivid		Color equivalent to “traditional color” in ITU-R BT.2390
BlackBlack level adjustmentNot available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [Canon Log 2] or [Canon Log 3]
MasterPedestal	-50 to +50	Increases or decreases the black level. Higher values brighten dark image areas but decrease contrast. Negative values darken blacks.
MasterBlack RedMasterBlackGreenMasterBlack Blue	-50 to +50 Corrects red, green, or blue color cast in blacks
Black GammaLower gamma curve correction, for dark image areasRaises or lowers the black part of the gamma curve in the following rangesAvailable with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
(1) Output(2) Input(3) Point(4) Level(5) Range(2)
Level -50 to +50 Sets the height of the lower gamma curve
Range	-20 to +50the vertex position	Sets the adjustment range, relative to [Point]
Point Sets
Low Key SaturationColor saturation adjustment in dark image areas
Activate On	Off Adjustment is enabled when set to [On]
Level -50 to +50 Sets the amount of adjustment
KneeCompression of bright image areas to prevent clipped highlightsAvailable with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
(1) Output(2) Input
Activate On, Off		Adjustment with each setting is enabled when set to [On]
Slope-35	to +50 Adjusts the slope above the knee point
Point 50 to	109 Adjusts the knee point
Saturation-10 to +10 Adjusts color saturation in bright image areas
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment
Level -10 to +50		Increases or decreases the level of edge sharpness
Detail Frequency	-8 to +8	Sets the center frequency for edge enhancement Higher values increase the frequency, sharpening images
Coring Level	-30 to +50	Sets the contrast threshold between edges and surrounding image areas, which determines edge enhancement Higher values prevent emphasizing subtle details, reducing noise
Limit -50 to +50 Restricts the amount of edge enhancement
Noise Reduction Reduction of image noise
Automatic On, Off Automatically adjusted when set to [On]
Spatial Filter	Off, 1 to 12	Reduces noise by applying a soft focus-like effect to the entire image Although no artifacts are produced, the image as a whole is softened when set to an option other than [Off]
Frame Correlation	Off, 1 to 3	Reduces noise by comparing current and previous images (fields) when set to a value other than off Although apparent resolution is not affected, moving subjects may result in artifacts
Skin Detail Skin-softening settings Controls skin tone detection and noise reduction Detected skin tone areas are displayed with a zebra pattern
Effect Level	Off, Low, Middle, High	Sets the level of the skin-softening filter, with [High] as the highest level
Hue -16 to +16 Sets the hue of skin tone to detect
Chroma	the color range of skrtoare to detect	Sets the saturation of skin tone to detect
Area Sets
Y Level Sets the brightness of skin tone to detect
Color Matrix Tuning Fine-tuning of image color tones
Gain -50 to +50 Adjusts color intensity
Phase -18 to +18 Adjusts hue
R-G	-50 to +50	Adjusts tint between cyan to green and between red to magenta
R-B		Adjusts tint between cyan to blue and between red to yellow
G-R		Adjusts tint between magenta to red and between green to cyan
G-B		Adjusts tint between magenta to blue and between green to yellow
B-R		Adjusts tint between yellow to red and between blue to cyan
B-G		Adjusts tint between yellow to green and between blue to magenta
Color CorrectionSettings to correct image areas with certain color characteristicsAreas for correction are detected accordinglyWith the settings configured, areas not detected are displayed in neutral colors (except when adjusting [Area A Revision Level], [Area B Revision Level], [Area A Revision Phase], and [Area B Revision Phase])
Select Area Off, Area A, Area B, Area A&B		Specifies areas (A or B) for color correctionArea A is corrected when set to [Area A]Area B is corrected when set to [Area B]Both areas are corrected when set to [Area A&B]
Area ASettingPhase	0 to 31	Sets the color phase of Area A
Area BSettingPhase		Sets the color phase of Area B
Area ASettingChroma		Sets the saturation of Area A
Area BSettingChroma		Sets the saturation of Area B
Area ASettingArea		Sets the color range of Area A
Area BSettingArea		Sets the color range of Area B
Area ASetting YLevel		Sets the brightness of Area A
Area BSetting YLevel		Sets the brightness of Area B
Area ARevisionLevel	-50 to +50	Sets the amount of correction applied to saturation in Area A
Area BRevisionLevel		Sets the amount of correction applied to saturation in Area B
Area ARevisionPhase	-18 to +18	Sets the amount of correction applied to the color phase of Area A
Area BRevisionPhase		Sets the amount of correction applied to the color phase of Area B
Other Functions[Over 100%] determines how the camera handles signals exceeding 100%Available with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]
Over 100%	Through Unmodified output
	Press	Compresses signals that are up to 108% so that they are at 100% levels
	Clip Discards portions of signals exceeding 100%

You can review custom picture file settings from the [Custom Picture] menu.

1. Select a custom picture file (F)
2. On the [Custom Picture] screen, select [Status].

1. Check the settings.

Edited custom picture files can be saved to a card and used with other cameras of the same model.

1. Select a custom picture file to save (✗)
2. On the [Custom Picture] screen, select [Save CFile].

1. Select an option.

- Save to card

Saves the edited custom picture file. Select a destination, then select [OK].

Up to 20 files can be saved. [New File] is displayed when you save the file, unless more than 20 files have already been saved. If 20 files have been saved, the files are overwritten with new files you save.

Load from card

Loads a custom picture file from a card. Select the file to load, then select [OK].

You can register 17- or 33-grid 3D LUT files in .cube format from the Blackmagic Design application DaVinci Resolve as look files in custom picture files to adjust the color tone of movies you record.

Registering look files

Before you begin, the look file to register should be copied to a card.

1. Load the card in the camera.
2. Select a custom picture file (√)
3. Select [Edit Cpile].

• To edit a protected ([+] custom picture file, select [Unprotect] by [Protect] to enable editing.
• If you will edit a custom picture file and register a look file at the same time, do the look file registration last.
• Select [Look File Setup].

5. Select [Register].

Look files on the card are listed.

1. Select a look file.
2. After applying the look file, select the gamma/color space.
3. Select [OK].

Caution

The following look files are not compatible.

• Input range outside a range of 0–1 in the header ("LUT_3D_INPUT_RANGE")
• 2 MB or larger, or with names exceeding 65 characters (including file extension)
• With file names that include unsupported characters Supported characters: 0–9, a–z, A–Z, underscore (_), hyphen (-), period (.), or single-byte space

Data section includes values outside a range of 0–1 - Color tones will not be converted correctly unless a suitable gamma/color space is used for input and output. A registered look file cannot be used if you change [Gamma/Color Space], [HLG Color], or [Over 100%] settings after registration. Signals above 100% or below 0% are not be used with [Gamma/Color Space] set to [BT.709 Standard]. Before registering look files for any signals above 100% that you will use, select [Press] in [Over 100%]. - Registered look files are applied to RAW movie thumbnails but not applied during playback.

Using look files for color adjustment

You can use registered look files for color adjustment.

1. On the [Edit CFile] screen, select [Look File].
2. Select [On].

To disable color adjustment based on look files, select [Off].

Removing look files

1. Select a custom picture file (√)
2. Select [Edit Cpile].

1. Select [Look File Setup].

1. Select [Delete].
2. Select [OK].

With Canon Log, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected by noise or uneven gradation, exposure, or colors, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. Banding or noise may also be noticeable in dark image areas. - Noise may become more noticeable if you enhance the contrast or edit images in similar ways. Record a few test movies and check the results in advance. - Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or, in post-production, perform color grading.

Caution

• With Canon Log, autofocusing may be more difficult for subjects under low light, or for low-contrast subjects. Difficulty in autofocusing can be reduced by shooting near maximum aperture or using a bright lens.
• Noise may appear at image edges if [Peripheral illum corr] in [Lens aberration correction] is set to [Enable] when Canon Log is set.
• Histograms with [Hunt/Log View Assist.] set to [On] are not based on conversion for View Assist display. Image areas shown in gray in the histogram roughly indicate signal values that are not used.

Shadow Compensation Saturation Limiting Maximum Brightness

You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of high-contrast scenes.

1. Select [HDR Movie Mode] ().

1. Set [HDR Movie Record.] to [Enable].

Caution

The ISO speed range is ISO 800-12800. - With HDR movie recording, skies, white walls, and similar subjects may be affected by noise or uneven gradation, exposure, or colors, depending on the subject or shooting conditions. Banding or noise may also be noticeable in dark image areas. - Record a few test movies and check the results in advance. Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or the [High ISO speed NR] or [Shadow comp.] settings. - Autofocusing in HDR movie recording may be more difficult for subjects under low light, or for low-contrast subjects. Difficulty in autofocusing can be reduced by shooting near maximum aperture or using a bright lens.

Note

For even better reproduction of bright image areas, also set the camera to [HDR shooting (PQ)] (

You can brighten shadows and other dark image areas by using [Shadow comp.].

On the screen shown next, select an option while previewing the results.

Caution

• Noise may increase and apparent resolution may change under some shooting conditions. Subjects such as the sky or white walls may not be rendered with smooth gradation, and colors may look irregular.
• Banding noise may be noticeable in dark image areas. This noise may also occur at low ISO speeds, but changing the ISO speed or the [high ISO speed NR] or [Shadow comp.] settings may make it less noticeable.

You can adjust overall color intensity by using [Saturation].

To select an adjustment value, use the < or > dial. Press < when finished.

This setting is available when [☐: ☐HDR shooting (PQ)] is set to [HDR PQ].

With [Disable], maximum brightness is not limited. Recommended when you will review images on a monitor supporting display at brightnesses exceeding 1000 nits. With [1000 nits], maximum brightness is limited to approx. 1000 nits.

Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-Lapse Movies

Still photos captured at a set interval are combined to create a time-lapse movie. This provides an accelerated view of processes that normally happen slowly, such as changes in a landscape, plant growth, or celestial motion.

1. Select [time-lapse movie] ().
2. Select [Time-lapse].

Select [Enable].

3. Set [Interval].

As you set the number, refer to the [] time required (1) and [] playback time (2). Turn the < > dial to select an option (hours : minutes : seconds). - Press < to display []. Set the desired number, then press < (Returns to [ ].) - Can be set in a range of [00:00:02]–[99:59:59]. (An interval of once per second is not available.) - Select [OK] to register the setting.

4. Set [No. of shots].

• As you set the number, refer to the time required ([]) and playback time ([]). Turn the < > dial to select an option (digit).
• Press < to display []. Set the desired number, then press < (Returns to [ ].) Can be set in a range of [0002]–[3600]. Make sure the playback time ([]) is not displayed in red.
• Select [OK] to register the setting.
• The playback time ([]) is displayed in red if the card does not have enough free space to record the specified number of shots. Although the camera can continue recording, the recording will stop when the card becomes full.
• Playback time ([]) is displayed in red if the [No. of shots] setting results in a file size exceeding 4 GB for a card not formatted in exFAT ([]). If you keep recording in this condition and the movie file size reaches 4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.

Note

For details on cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance requirements), see Estimated recording time, movie bit rate, file size, and card performance requirements.

- If the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.

5. Select [Movie rec. size].

Available movie recording sizes (a combination of resolution, frame rate, and compression) are displayed. Options vary depending on the [Main rec. format] setting. For details on main recording formats, resolutions, frame rates, and compression, see Main Recording Format and Movie Recording Size. With [Main rec. format] set to [XF-HEVC S YCC422 10bit]

• NTSC: 8K-U 23.97P Intra 8K-U 25.00P Intra • NTSC: 8K-U 29.97P Intra 8K-U 25.00P Intra

With [Main rec. format] set to [XF-AVC S YCC422 10bit] or [XF-AVC S YCC420 8bit]

• NTSC: 4K-UP 29.97P Intra 4K-U 25.00P Intra • NTSC: 4K-U 23.97P Intra 4K-U 25.00P Intra • NTSC: 4K U 29.97P Intra 4K-U 25.00P Intra • NTSC: FHD 23.97P Intra FHD 25.00P Intra

Caution

FHD is not available when [Movie cropping] is set to [Enable], or with RF-S/EF-S lenses attached.

6. Select [Main rec. format].

The available main recording formats are listed. For details on these options, see Main Recording Format.

7. Set [Auto exposure].

Fixed 1st frame

When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.

Each frame

Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. Note that any functions such as Picture Style and white balance that are set to [Auto] will be set automatically for each subsequent shot.

Caution

- Significant changes in brightness between shots may prevent the camera from shooting at the specified interval when [Interval] is set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] is set to [Each frame].

8. Set [Screen auto off].

Disable

Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed. (The screen turns off only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen will turn off when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.

Enable

The screen will turn off when approximately 10 seconds have elapsed after shooting starts.

Caution

Even if [Screen auto off] is set to [Disable], the screen turns off during exposure. Also note that images may not be displayed if the interval between shots is too brief.

Note

- During time-lapse movie recording, you can press the <INFO> button to turn the screen on or off.

9. Set [Beep per taken].

Set to [0] to prevent the camera from beeping for each shot.

10. Check the settings.

• Time required (1)

Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.

- Playback time (2)

Length of the time-lapse movie.

11. Close the menu.

- Press the < > button to turn off the menu screen.

12. Read the message.

Read the message and select [OK].

13. Take a test shot.

(1) (2)

• Press the <INFO> button and double-check the time required (1) and interval (2) shown on the screen.
• Set the exposure and shooting functions, then focus.
• Press the shutter button completely to take a test shot, which is recorded to the card as a still photo.
• If there are no problems with the test shot, go to the next step. To take more test shots, repeat this step.

Note

• Test shots are captured in JPEG quality. In [ ] Mode, you can set the shutter speed in a range of 1/4000 to 30 sec.
• You can set the maximum limit for Auto ISO in [ ] mode or in [ ,M] mode with ISO Auto, in the [ Max for Auto] option of
• If you have set [Half-press] in [Shutter btn function for movies] to [Meter.+Servo AF], it is automatically changed to [Meter.+One-Shot AF] when you set up time-lapse movie recording.

14. Press the movie shooting button.

The camera is now ready to start recording a time-lapse movie. To return to step 13, press the movie shooting button again.

15. Record the time-lapse movie.

• Press the shutter button completely to start recording the time-lapse movie. AF will not work during time-lapse movie recording. A recording icon “●” is displayed on the screen as the time-lapse movie is recorded.
• When the set number of shots are taken, the time-lapse movie recording ends.
• To cancel recording time-lapse movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].

Note

• Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots as in step 13 or even recording test time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended. The movie's field of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse movie recording is approx. 100%. - To cancel time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter button completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card. - If the time required for recording is more than 24 hours but not more than 48 hours, "2 days" will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments. Even if the time-lapse movie's playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie file will still be created. In this case, [00'00"] is indicated as the playback time. - If the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold separately) is recommended. - YCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the BT.709 color space are used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.

Caution

• Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components.
• Time-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected. • Movie Servo AF will not function.
• If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not be displayed properly (may differ from that of the resulting movie).
• Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
• Recording time-lapse movies under flickering light may cause noticeable screen flickering, and images may be captured with horizontal stripes (noise) or irregular exposure. Images displayed as time-lapse movies are recorded may look different from the resulting movie (in details such as inconsistent brightness from flickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO speed).
• When recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed during shooting may look different from what is actually recorded in the movie. In such cases, the [ExpoShM] will blink. If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.
• During time-lapse movie recording, auto power off will not take effect. Also, you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back images, etc. Sound is not recorded for time-lapse movies. To start or stop time-lapse movie recording, you can press the shutter button completely, regardless of the [Shutter btn function for movies] setting.
• Significant changes in brightness between shots may prevent the camera from shooting at the specified interval when [Interval] is set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] is set to [Each frame].
• If the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long exposures), or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by shooting intervals nearly the same as the shutter speed.
• If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.
• If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
• The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as a movie file.
• Set [Time-lapse movie] to [Disable] if you will connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use an application such as Camera Connect. Options other than [Disable] will prevent the camera from communicating with the computer.
• Image stabilization is not applied in time-lapse movie recording.
• Time-lapse movie shooting ends if the power switch is set to < , for example, and the setting is changed to [Disable]. Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
• The following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and switch the setting to [Disable].
• Selecting either [Clean now.] in [✗: Sensor cleaning] or [Basic settings] in [Reset camera]
• Switching the shooting mode to [1], or

Image quality may be lower if you start time-lapse movie recording while a white

[icon] or red [icon] is displayed. For best results, before recording, wait until the white [or red] icon is no longer displayed, which indicates that the camera has cooled down.

With [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture value may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in some shooting modes.

Note

- You can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and stop time-lapse movie recording.

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

• First, pair Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera ( After you take some test shots and the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 14, set the release timing/movie shooting switch on the BR-E1 to <●> (immediate release) or <2> (2-sec. delay).
• If the remote control's switch has been set to < the time-lapse movie recording cannot start.

Camera Status/Remote Control Setting	<•> Immediate Release <2> 2-sec. Delay	< >Movie Recording
Test-recording screen Test recording To recording standby
Recording standby Starts recording To test-recording screen
During time-lapse movie recording	Ends recording Ends recording

Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-Lapse Movies

For guidelines on how long you can record time-lapse movies (until the battery runs out), see Movie recording.

Movie recording can be started by the self-timer.

1. Select [Movie self-timer] ().
2. Select an option.

1. Record the movie.

After you press the movie shooting button or tap [the camera beeps and displays the number of seconds left before recording.

Note

To cancel the self-timer, either tap the screen or press <

The tally lamp lights up or blinks to indicate camera status.

1. Select [formally lamp] ().
2. Select an option.

- When set to [On], the tally lamp lights up or blinks as follows.

Lit Movie recording in progress
Blinking rapidly	Cannot record movies, due to a low battery level or insufficient card free spaceHigh internal camera temperature, due to hot shooting conditions or extended movie recording
Blinking slowly Movie recording is now possible for up to 6 min.

With pre-recording, automatic movie recording is already in progress a specified amount of time before you manually start recording.

This preliminary recording is referred to as pre-recording. The camera pre-records automatically during movie recording standby.

1. Select [re-recording set.] ().
2. Select [Pre-recording].

Select [On].

1. Select [Recording time].

- Select the amount of time for pre-recording, before recording is started manually.

4. Record the movie.

Record the movie in the same way as normal movie recording. Movies are recorded with the pre-recorded part added.

Caution

Restrictions during pre-recording

• The following items are not displayed on the movie recording screen.
• Electronic level
• Histogram
• Some Quick Control settings (functionality is limited during pre-recording)
• Touch sounds are not played.
• The following operations and camera status pauses pre-recording. While pre-recording is paused, [1] drinks in the upper right of the movie recording screen.
• Attaching or detaching a lens
• Connecting via HDMI
• Turning the Mode dial
• Turning the camera off/on
• Opening/closing the card slot cover
• Low remaining battery level • High camera temperature

- [Standby: Low res.] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed (☐).

Note

- Current information when recording begins is applied to movie Exif information.

Movie Digital IS

The camera's IS mode and movie digital IS features reduce camera shake as movies are recorded.

They can provide effective stabilization even when non-IS lenses are used.

With IS-equipped lenses, setting the lens Image Stabilizer switch to < ON combines stabilization by the lens and camera.

1. Select [☐S (Image Stabilizer) mode] ().
2. Select [IS mode].

Select [On] to use IS mode on the camera.

1. Select [Image Stabilizer mode] ().
2. Select [Digital IS].

1. Select an option.

- Off (10% OFF) Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.

- On ( ) Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnified.

- Enhanced (On) Compared to when [On] is set, stronger camera shake can be corrected. The image will be more magnified.

Caution

• Movie digital IS will not function when the lens's optical Image Stabilizer switch is set to <OFF>. With non-IS lenses, setting [Digital IS] to [On] or [Enhanced] also sets [IS mode] to [On]. Although movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using RF-S or EF-S lenses or movie cropping, the image area is further reduced.
• Stabilization by Movie digital IS may be less effective at some movie recording sizes.
• The wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more effective the image stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less effective the image stabilization will be.
• When using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Off] is recommended.
• Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital IS.
• Consider setting to [Off] when using a TS-E lens or fish-eye lens.
• Since Movie digital IS magnifies the image, the image looks more grainy. Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable. With the frame rate set to 239.76, 200.00, 119.88, or 100.00 fps, Movie digital IS may not provide sufficient stabilization when shooting with a macro lens near the closest focusing distance.

Note

• For details on configuring image stabilization for still photo shooting, see Image Stabilizer (IS Mode). With some lenses, even more effective stabilization (indicated by “+” next to the IS icon) is possible when the lens's IS is used in conjunction with [IS mode] and [Movie digital IS] on the camera. For details on lenses compatible with this feature, visit the Canon website (

Auto leveling helps keep movies straight during recording.

1. Select [Auto level] ().
2. Select an option.

False Color Display

Color-coded display in six colors based on the brightness level is shown on the screen during movie recording. This can help you adjust the exposure.

1. Select [false color set.] ().
2. Select [False color].

Select [On].

1. Adjust the exposure as needed (4)

Adjust the exposure, referring to false color descriptions in False Color Display if necessary.

False color display is applied to images on the camera screen and viewfinder. You can also check false color display details in [False color index].

Color Meaning
Red White clipping
Yellow Just below white clipping
Pink One stop over 18% gray
Green 18% gray
Blue Just above black clipping
Purple Black clipping
Neutral color Brightness other than above

Caution

• Colors indicating the brightness level may change when the screen switches between recording standby and movie recording, and under some shooting settings. The following features are not available when the camera is set to use false colors.

• Auto Lighting Optimizer - Zebra display - MF peaking • Dual Shooting (Still Photos and Movies)

Note

• With [HDMI display] set to [], false color display applies to external monitors connected via HDMI, and no image is displayed on the camera screen. With [☐: HDMI display] set to [☐+☐], false color display applies to the camera screen, and external monitors connected via HDMI show the actual image.

To simplify exposure adjustment before or during movie recording, you can display a striped pattern over or around image areas of a specified brightness.

1. Select [Zebra settings] ().
2. Select [Zebra].

Select [On].

1. Select [Zebra pattern].

[Zebra 1]: Displays left-slanting stripes around areas of the specified brightness.

[Zebra 2]: Displays right-slanting stripes over areas that exceed the specified brightness.

[Zebra 1+2]: Displays both [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2]. [Zebra 1] display takes precedence where [Zebra 1] and [Zebra 2] display areas overlap.

4. Set the level.

Zebra 1 level

Zebra 2 level

Turn the < > dial to set it.

Note

• The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when HDR-PQ is set. Note that the maximum brightness value varies depending on [highlight tone priority] and [picture Style] settings. The maximum brightness value does not reach 100% when the [Custom Picture] gamma is set to [Canon Log 2] or [Canon Log 3].
• Checking the zebra display level in advance is recommended when you will set [Zebra pattern].

Waveform Setting Recording Emphasis Aspect Marker

You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the screen or in the viewfinder during movie recording.

Note

For details on the following topics, see Shooting Information Display for still photo shooting.

• Customizing Information on the Screen
• Customizing Information in the Viewfinder
• Grid
• Histogram • Electronic Level Size
• Battery Level (%) Display • Card Free Space (%) Display
• Lens Information Display
• Clearing Settings

You can display a waveform monitor on the screen or in the viewfinder. It is displayed on external monitors during HDMI output.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Waveform setting].

1. Set [Wave. monitor disp.] to [On].

4. In [Type], select a waveform monitor option.

Line

Displays a waveform of the entire image, with horizontal coordinates of the image on the horizontal axis and brightness values on the vertical axis.

RGB

RGB parade display, with horizontal coordinates of the image on the horizontal axis and RGB brightness values on the vertical axis.

Caution

The waveform monitor is not displayed in [] shooting mode.

Note

- The waveform monitor is also shown on the screen for adjusting custom picture image quality.

1. Select [☑ shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Recording emphasis].

- On The screen is outlined in red while movie recording is in progress.

- Off No frame is displayed to call attention to recording in progress.

If you will change the image aspect ratio when editing the recorded movie, you can display aspect markers on the movie recording screen (during standby and recording) to be aware of the final angle of view after editing.

1. Select [Shooting info. disp.] ().
2. Select [Aspect marker].

1. Select an option.

- Select a display option.

Note

- Markers are not shown during movie playback (recorded movies are not tagged with aspect marker information).

You can change the Quick Control (views available during movie recording).

1. Select [Quick Ctrl screen] ().
2. Select the view to display.

Turn the < > dial to select Quick Control display options. For items you prefer not to display, press < > to clear the checkmark [√]. The [√] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time. - Select [OK] to register the setting.

Set to [On] to conserve battery power and control the rise of internal camera temperature during standby.

1. Select [Standby: Low res.] ().
2. Select an option.

Caution

• Image appearance during standby may differ from the appearance during movie recording, but this setting does not affect recording quality.
• Briefly when you start or stop recording movies, image display may remain on the current frame instead of being updated.

You can select the output range of video signals output via an HDMI connection.

1. Select [DMI output range for C. Log] ().
2. Select an option.

Prioritize Full Range

Full-range output is used whenever possible. Note that the output range will be automatically adjusted to suit display specifications.

- Narrow Range

Narrow-range (video range) output is used.

Caution

This setting is disabled when [DMI RAW output] is set to [On].

Preparing to Embed XML Files Embedding XML Files Clearing Metadata Settings √ Checking Metadata Status Embedding Custom Picture Files

Movie files can be embedded with metadata that conforms to the NewsML-G2 specification. Before you begin, the metadata to embed should be saved to a card.

Note

• Metadata can also be embedded using the Content Transfer Professional mobile app. Settings in [Metadata] are disabled when metadata is embedded with Content Transfer Professional.

Preparing to Embed XML Files

1. Save the XML file in the [XMLTAG] folder at the root level of the card.
2. Create and save an XML file conforming to the NewsML-G2 specification.
3. When selecting an XML file to embed, you can select from up to 100 files.
4. Load a card in card slot 2 (✗)
5. Select [☐letadata] ().
6. Set [Add News Metadata] to [On].

1. Select [News Metadata].

This option is not available unless a card is loaded.

1. Select the metadata.
2. Turn the dial to make a selection.
3. The first 8 characters of the XML file name are shown on the screen, along with a preview of the data itself.
4. Select [OK].

The metadata is registered in the camera.

You can clear (delete) metadata registered to the camera.

1. Select [Clear Metadata settings].

● Metadata registered to the camera is cleared.

You can review details of the metadata registered to the camera.

1. Select [Check News Metadata status].

2. Check the details as needed.

Custom picture files can be embedded in movie files by setting [Add CP File] to [On] when [CP function] in [☐: Custom Picture] is set to [On].

Caution

• Custom picture files are not embedded in RAW movies.
• When you are recording both main and proxy movies, custom picture files are embedded in proxy movies if the main movies are RAW movies (☑) If the main movies are XF-HEVC S or XF-AVC S movies (☑), custom picture files are embedded in the main and proxy movie.

Count Up Start Time Setting Movie Recording Count Movie Play Count HDMI Drop Frame

Time codes record the time automatically as movies are recorded. Time codes always record elapsed hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. They are mainly used when movies are edited.

To set up the time code, use [time code].

Caution

- Time codes may not be displayed correctly if your movies are played back on devices other than the camera.

Rec run

The time code advances only during movie recording. Time codes in each movie file recorded continue from the last time code in the previous file.

Free run

The time code keeps advancing, even when you are not recording.

Caution

• When set to [Free run], time codes are not added to High Frame Rate movies that you record.
• When set to [Free run], time codes will be affected by any changes to settings for time, zone, or daylight saving time (☐)

You can set the initial time of the time code.

- Manual input setting

Enables you to set any starting hour, minute, second, and frame.

Reset

Resets the time set with [Manual input setting] or [Set to camera time] to "00:00:00." or "00:00:00:" (☑).

Set to camera time

Matches the hour, minute, and second set as the time on the camera. Sets the frame value to "00."

You can select how time is displayed on the movie recording screen.

Rec time

During recording standby, displays the available recording time. During recording, displays the time that has elapsed since recording began (1).

Time code

Displays the time code during movie recording (2).

You can select how time is shown in basic information display on the movie playback screen.

Rec time

Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.

Time code

Displays the time code during movie playback.

Note

Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting. The [Movie play count] setting in [Time code] is linked to the [Movie play count], so that these settings always match. The "frame" count is not displayed during recording.

Time code

Time codes can be added to movies as you record them to an external device via HDMI.

Off

No time code is added to HDMI video output.

On

Time codes are added to HDMI video output. When [On] is set, [Rec Command] is displayed.

Rec Command

For HDMI video output recorded by an external device, you can synchronize recording to when you start and stop recording movies on the camera.

Off

Recording is started and stopped by the external device.

On

Recording by an external device is synchronized to starting/stopping recording on the camera.

Caution

Time codes are not added to HDMI video output when you record High Frame Rate movies with [Count up] in [Time code] set to [Free run]. To determine compatibility of external recording devices with [Time code] and [Rec Command] functions, check with the device manufacturer. Even with [Time code] set to [Off], external recording devices may add time codes to movies, depending on their specifications. For details on device specifications relevant to adding time code to HDMI input, check with the device manufacturer.

The time code's frame count will cause a discrepancy between the actual time and the time code if the frame rate is set to ZCSP 9.76 fps), (119133fps), (59.94 fps) for Z9.97P (29.97 fps). You can choose whether to automatically compensate for this discrepancy.

Enable

Corrects the discrepancy automatically by skipping time code numbers (DF: drop frame).

Disable

The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: non-drop frame).

Time codes are displayed as follows.

Enable 00:00:00. (Playback: 00:00:00.00)
Disable 00:00:00: (Playback: 00:00:00:00)

Note

The [Drop frame] setting item is not displayed when the frame rate is set to 24.00P (24.00 fps) or 98 fps), and when [: System frequency] is set to [50.00Hz:PAL].

[3 Exposure] ☆

[ Assist shooting/HDMI]

[3 Exposure]

Exposure compensation

Exposure compensation is available in [1], [2] and [3] modes. For details on exposure compensation, see Manual Exposure Compensation.

SO speed settings

In [1] Mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto.

ISO speed range

You can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum). ISO expansion can also be configured.

Max for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in movie recording in [ ] , [ ] or [ ] mode or in [ ] mode with ISO Auto.

Max for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K time-lapse/Full HD time-lapse movie recording in [1], or [v] mode for in [ ] mode with ISO Auto.

Av 1/8-stop incr.

You can set aperture values on a finer scale when recording movies with RF or RF-S lenses.

This feature is available in [ ] or [ ] recording mode.

Select [Enable] to change the aperture increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to 1/8 stop.

Caution

[1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses are used. - When set to [Enable], setting options in [☐: Exposure level increments] are disabled and have no effect.

Auto slow shutter

You can choose whether to record movies that are brighter and less affected by image noise than when set to [Disable] by automatically slowing the shutter speed under low light.

Available in [] or [] recording mode. Applies when the frame rate of the movie

recording size is 50.04P 50.00P

- Disable

Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement, less affected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].

Enable

Enables you to record brighter movies than when set to [Disable] by automatically reducing the shutter speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.

Note

Setting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.

Shutdown warning guidance

Shutdown warning guidance (about auto shutdown during movie recording due to high internal temperature under certain movie recording settings) can be displayed on startup. If you prefer not to display shutdown warning guidance, set [shutdown warning guidance] to [Off].

HDMI display

You can specify how movies are displayed as they are recorded via HDMI to an external device. Movie output itself corresponds to the [movie rec. size] setting.

The default setting is [+]

● + □

Enables movie display both on the camera screen and on the other device, via HDMI output.

Camera operations such as image playback or menu display are shown on the other device via HDMI, not on the camera screen.

•

Deactivates the camera screen during output via HDMI, so that the screen is blank. Shooting information, AF points, and other information is included in HDMI output and shown on any monitors connected to the external recording device, but you can stop output of this information by pressing the < >Button.

Before recording movies externally, confirm that no information is being sent by the camera by making sure no shooting information, AF points, and so on is displayed on external monitors or other devices.

Settings such as time codes may not be recorded correctly in external movie recording with [standby: Low res.] set to [On].

? For longer HDMI output

To continue HDMI output for longer than 30 min., select [☐+☐], then set [Auto power off] in [√: Power saving] to [Disable] (☑). HDMI output will continue after the camera screen turns off when the time set in [Screen off] elapses.

Caution

• HDMI output without information prevents display of warnings about the card space, battery level, or high internal temperature (via HDMI). During HDMI output, display of the next image may take some time if you switch between movies of different recording qualities or frame rates.
• Avoid operating the camera when recording movies to external devices, which may cause information to be displayed in the HDMI video output.
• Brightness and color of movies recorded with the camera may look different from that of HDMI video output recorded by external devices, depending on the viewing environment.

Note

• By pressing the < > button, you can change the information displayed. Time codes can be added to HDMI video output ( ). Audio is also output via HDMI, except when [Sound recording] is set to [Disable].

HDMI RAW output☆

Set to [On] for RAW movie output at resolutions up to 8K from the HDMI terminal to compatible devices.

As recording begins, movies are also recorded to card ☐ (if it is in the camera) in XF-AVC format.

You can restrict recording to external recording devices when card is not inserted by setting [Rec Command] to [On] (☑)

Set the movie recording quality in [Movie rec. size] ().

Caution

Movies will not be displayed correctly unless the connected device is compatible with the camera's HDMI RAW output. [HDMI RAW output] is not available in [ ]mode. - When HDMI RAW output is set, [CP function] in [☐: Custom Picture] is locked to [On]. - Image display on external recording devices conforms to the device settings and differs from display on the camera. Movies recorded to card conform to the image settings configured on the camera. Some restrictions apply to the following features when the camera is set to HDMI RAW output.

• [150 speed settings] on the [] tab

- [Record func+card/folder sel.] on the [ ♦] tab

- The following features are not available when the camera is set to HDMI RAW output.

• High Frame Rate movies • HDR shooting (PQ) • Auto Lighting Optimizer • Highlight Tone Priority • Picture Style • Clarity • Pre-recording setting • Movie digital IS • HDMI display • HDMI resolution • Magnified image display

- Canon Log HDMI Output Range

Note

- You can include time code in output to devices compatible with RAW movies by setting [Time code] in the [☐: Time code] [HDMI] setting to [On]. With [Rec Command] set to [On], you can also control starting and stopping of movie recording on devices compatible with RAW movies by starting and stopping movie recording on the camera (☑).

Guidance Display Before Recording

Warning Indicator Display in Movie Recording

Guidance Display Before Recording

Shutdown warning guidance may be displayed when the camera starts up, after settings are adjusted, or in other situations (☐).

The guidance warns that the camera may become hot internally if movies are recorded under the current settings, and that if you continue recording, the camera may turn off automatically.

If you will record over an extended period, consider changing the setting indicated by the guidance (movie recording size), so that you can record without the camera displaying guidance.

If you prefer to record without changing the settings, note any warning indicators displayed as you record.

A 10-level indicator (1) is displayed during movie recording in case of excessive internal camera temperature.

As the internal temperature rises, the level on the indicator extends to the right. How fast the level increases will depend on shooting conditions. Levels 1–7 are marked in white, but once the temperature reaches level 8, the color changes.

[10] flashes in red if you continue recording after the indicator reaches level 9, marked in orange. A flashing icon indicates that the camera will soon turn off automatically.

A message is displayed if you continue to record while the icon is flashing, and the camera automatically turns off.

Subsequent recording

To keep recording under the same settings, leave the camera off and let it cool down for a while. Note that the camera may overheat again after you resume recording.

Caution

Precautions for movie recording

• Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera's internal components. If you record something that has fine detail, moiré or false colors may result. If [A] or [] is set and the ISO speed or aperture value changes during movie recording, the white balance may also change.
• If you record a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may flicker.
• If you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light, horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an electronic focusing ring. Recording a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, inaccurate lens aberration correction, or loss of focus. Large aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.
• Performing AF during movie recording may cause the following kinds of issues: significant temporary loss of focus, recording of changes in movie brightness, temporary stopping of movie recording, or recording of mechanical lens sounds.
• Avoid covering the built-in microphones with your fingers or other objects.
• Connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable during movie recording will end recording. If necessary, also see General Still Photo Shooting Precautions. The camera may become hot in movie recording while connected via Wi-Fi. Use a tripod or take other measures to avoid handheld recording.
• Image quality may be lower when recording movies under a combination of conditions such as high ISO speeds, high temperatures, low shutter speeds, and low light.
• Recording movies over an extended period may cause the camera's internal temperature to rise and affect image quality. Turn off the camera when possible if you are not recording movies.

[ ] and [] display

• [ ] may be displayed in hot environments or when factors such as recording movies or displaying images on the screen over extended periods increase the camera's internal temperature. If this condition continues, a red [icon] will be displayed. Note that the time until a red [ ] appears after the [icon] varies depending on shooting conditions. The [icon] with red indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated automatically. Note that the time until movie recording stops automatically when the red [icon] is displayed varies depending on shooting conditions.
• Red [T] display indicates that movie recording will soon stop automatically, so turn the camera off or take other measures, and wait until it cools down. Moreover, when you are not shooting or recording, always turn off the camera. After movie recording automatically stops, you will be unable to record movies or shoot still photos until the camera has cooled down.

Recording and image quality

- If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer switch to <, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. This will consume battery power, and it may reduce the total movie recording time. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the Image Stabilizer switch to

<OFF

• If the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the movie may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with manual exposure.
• If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on the screen.
• Image noise or irregular colors may occur when recording at high ISO speeds, high temperatures, slow shutter speeds, or under low light.
• Video and audio quality of recorded movies may be worse on other devices, and playback may not be possible, even if the devices support XF-HEVC/XF-AVC formats.
• If you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie recording. The indicator shows how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory), and it increases more quickly the slower the card is. If the indicator (2) becomes full, movie recording will stop automatically.

(2)

• If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will not appear or the level (if displayed) will not increase much. First, record a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
• If the indicator shows that the card is full, and movie recording stops automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded properly.
• If the card's writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.
• Banding or noise may be noticeable in dark image areas, depending on [

Custom Picture], [HDR: HDR shooting (PQ)], [Highlight tone priority], or [HDMI RAW output] settings, due to the effect of settings that determine the dynamic range, gamma curve, and similar details. Record a few test movies and check the results in advance.

- Image quality may improve if you change the ISO speed or the [High ISO speed NR] or [Shadow comp.] settings, or, in post-production, perform color grading.

Audio restrictions

The following restrictions apply in [ ] mode.

• Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.
• When you play back movies in Windows, movie images and sound may become slightly out of synchronization.

Note

Notes for movie recording

● Each time you record a movie, a new movie file is created on the card. Field of view (coverage) is approx. 100%. - Focusing is also possible by pressing the < > button - To enable starting/stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button completely, set [Fully-press] for [●: Shutter btn function for movies] to [Start/stop mov rec] (✗) - Focus preset during movie recording is available when using (super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the second half of 2011. For details on using built-in or external microphones, see Sound Recording.

This chapter describes autofocus operation and drive modes and introduces menu settings on the AF [A]o.

☆ to the right of titles indicates functions only available in [Fv], [P], [Tv], [Av], [M], or [BULB] mode.

Note

- < > stands for autofocus. < > stands for manual focus.

• Tab Menus: AF (Still Photos) • Tab Menus: AF (Movie Recording) - AF Operation ☆ - Movie Servo AF - Selecting the AF Area - Manual Focus • Registering People to Prioritize☆ - Servo AF Characteristics ☆ - Customizing AF Functions - Focus Preset - Selecting the Drive Mode • Using the Self-Timer - Remote Control Shooting

- AF operation/area

(1) AF operation ☆ (2) AF area ☆ (3) Whole area tracking Servo AF ☆ (4) Focus mode

Note

- When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is displayed on the [A] tab.

- Subject detection

(1) Subject to detect ☆ (2) Eye detection (3) Register people priority ☆ (4) Action Priority ☆

Servo AF character.

(1) Case Auto (2) Case Auto character. (3) Case Manual ☆ (4) Tracking sensitivity ☆ (5) Accel./decel. tracking ☆

- Customize AF operation

(1) Servo 1st image priority (2) One-Shot AF release prior. (3) Preview AF (4) Lens drive when AF impossible (5) AF-assist beam firing

- Customized controls

(1) Limit AF areas ☆ (2) Orientation linked AF point ☆ (3) Limit subject to detect ☆ (4) L/R eye detection ☆

MF related

(1) MF peaking settings ☆ (2) Focus guide (3) Lens electronic MF ☆

• Various settings/Various settings

(1) Register/recall AF-related settings ☆ (2) AF Setting Guide URL ☆

• AF operation/area

(1) Movie Servo AF (2) AF area ☆ (3) Focus mode

Note

- When lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is displayed on the [AF1] tab.

- Subject detection

(1) Subject to detect ☆ (2) Eye detection (3) Register people priority ☆ (4) Switching tracked subjects ☆

- Servo AF character.

(1) Movie Servo AF speed ☆ (2) Movie Servo AF track sens. ☆

- Customize AF operation/Customized controls

(1) Lens drive when AF impossible ☆ (2) Limit AF areas ☆ (3) Limit subject to detect ☆ (4) L/R eye detection ☆

MF related

(1) MF peaking settings ☆ (2) Focus guide (3) Lens electronic MF ☆

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects, Servo AF for Moving Subjects, AI Focus AF for Automatic AF Mode Switching

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject.

1. Set the focus mode to AF.

For RF lenses with a focus mode switch: Set the lens's focus mode switch to <AF

For RF lenses without a focus mode switch, set [AF Focus mode] to [AF].

2. Select [AF operation] ().

3. Select an option.

Note

• If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. With One-Shot AF, shooting is not possible even by pressing the shutter button completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult. With Servo AF, the camera shoots even when subjects are not in focus.

This AF operation is suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once.

• When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture. For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the Drive Mode.

Note

If [Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved. - See Lens electronic MF when using a lens that supports electronic manual focusing.

Shooting with the focus locked

When shooting with the focus locked, you can focus with One-Shot AF before recomposing the shot and shooting.

1. Aim the AF point over a subject to focus on, then press the shutter button halfway.

1. After the subject is in focus, keep the shutter button pressed halfway and recompose the shot.

1. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture.

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

• When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. For details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting, see Selecting the Drive Mode. In [mode], by default, the camera automatically switches to Servo AF in response to subject movement.

Caution

• Accurate focusing may not be possible at high aperture values or depending on the lens, the distance to the subject, and how fast the subject is moving.
• Zooming during continuous shooting may throw off the focus. Zoom first, then recompose and shoot.
• Consider shooting with One-Shot AF if Servo AF operation is unsteady for still subjects.

The AF mode is automatically switched from [One-Shot AF] to [Servo AF] based on subject status while you are pressing the shutter button halfway or shooting continuously.

Subject Detection AF

With this function enabled, the camera keeps focusing on the subject during movie recording.

1. Set the still photo shooting/movie recording switch to < 城

1. Select [AF] ( ).
2. Select [Movie Servo AF].

4. Select an option.

Enable

• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
• To keep the focus at a specific position, or if you prefer not to record mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by tapping [Movie Servo AF paused] (1) in the lower left of the screen.

- Movie Servo AF will resume if you return to movie recording after operations such as pressing the < > button or changing the AF area.

Disable

While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously. Pressing the < AF-ON> button focuses only once.

Caution

Precautions when set to [Movie Servo AF: Enable]

- Shooting conditions that make focusing difficult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera. • A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.
• When shooting with a higher aperture value. • Also see Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult.

Since the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the possible movie recording time ( y ) will be shortened.

The camera's built-in microphone may also record mechanical sounds of the lens or sounds of camera/lens operations if AF operations are performed or the camera or lens is operated during movie recording. In this case, using an external microphone may reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone, it may be more effective to remove the external microphone from the camera and position it away from the camera and lens.

● Movie Servo AF pauses during magnified view.

During movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnification).

You can specify whether to use Movie Servo AF if the subject set in [AS] subject to detect] (is not detected.

- Detect. priority

Movie Servo AF is used for automatically selected subjects within the area set in [AF AF area] (3)

Subjects set in [AF: Subject to detect] are prioritized for automatic selection.

Detect. only

Movie Servo AF is only used for subjects set in [AF: Subject to detect]. Movie Servo AF stops if no subject is detected.

AF Area Selecting the AF Area☆ Whole Area Tracking Servo AF☆ Subject to Detect☆ Eye Detection Action Priority☆ √ Tracking with a Button Manually Setting AF Points or Zone AF Frames Adjusting the Zone AF Frame Size Registering AF Points (Home Position) Magnified View AF Shooting Tips √ Shooting Conditions That Make Focusing Difficult AF Range

This section describes AF area operation with [AF: Whole area tracking Servo AF] set to [Off].

• Select the AF area by pressing the < > button.
• You can switch [AF: Whole area tracking Servo AF] [On] or [Off] by pressing the < > button.
• Servo AF for [ ], [ ] or [ ] tracks subjects with [AF: Whole area tracking Servo AF] set to [Off] and [AF: Subject to detect] set to [None].

☐: Spot AF / ☐: Spot AF

The camera focuses in a narrower area than 1-point AF.

☐: 1-point AF / ☐: 1-point AF

The camera focuses using a single AF point [].

: Expand AF area: 7 : Expand AF area:

Focuses using one AF point [] and the AF area outlined here in blue. Effective for moving subjects, which are difficult to track with 1-point AF.

Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Flexible Zone AF.

When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [].

: Expand AF area: Around / ☐ Expand AF area: Around

Focuses using one AF point [☐] and the surrounding AF area outlined here in blue, which makes it easier to focus on moving subjects than with Expand AF area: ☐ When Servo AF is used, first you will focus using an AF point [☐].

[1]: Flexible Zone AF 1 (default)

With Flexible Zone AF 1, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [] ().

Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving subjects.

By default, a square Zone AF frame is set.

Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion, and subject distance.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [] over AF points in focus.

[2]: Flexible Zone AF 2

With Flexible Zone AF 2, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame [] ().

Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and effective for moving subjects.

By default, a vertical rectangular Zone AF frame is set.

Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion, and subject distance.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [ ] over AF points in focus.

[3]: Flexible Zone AF 3

With Flexible Zone AF 3, you can freely set the size of the Zone AF frame []. Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames to cover a larger area than Expand AF area, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area and is effective for moving subjects.

By default, a horizontal rectangular Zone AF frame is set.

Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion, and subject distance.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [] over AF points in focus.

[ ]: Whole area AF

Uses auto selection AF in a whole-area AF frame to cover a larger area than Flexible Zone AF, which makes focusing easier than with 1-point AF/Expand AF area/Flexible Zone AF and is effective for moving subjects.

Focusing areas are determined not only based on the nearest subject but also based on a variety of other conditions such as faces (of people or animals), vehicles, subject motion, and subject distance.

Pressing the shutter button halfway displays [] over AF points in focus.

You can select the AF area to suit the shooting conditions or subject. If you prefer to focus manually, see Manual Focus.

1. Select [AF area] ( , ).
2. Select the AF area.

The screen above is displayed when [AF orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt]. Set separate AF areas after choosing vertical and horizontal orientations.

Note

• To set the AF area, you can also press the < > button and then the < > button. The following descriptions apply to the camera with AF operation set to [Servo AF] ( ). Once a subject is in focus with [One-Shot AF] ( ), the AF point turns green.

Whole Area Tracking Servo AF

You can set whether to switch to whole-area subject tracking during Servo AF (while the shutter button is pressed halfway with [ : AF operation] set to [Servo AF]).

1. Select [: Whole area tracking Servo AF] ().
2. Select an option.

On

The AF area switches to whole-area AF to track subjects across the entire screen area while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

Off

Subjects are tracked only within AF points when the shutter button is pressed halfway or completely.

You can specify conditions for automatic selection of the main subject to track.

Selecting an option other than [None] will display a tracking frame [] for the main subject detected. The tracking frame will move to track subjects that start moving.

You can shoot with the subject's eyes in focus by setting [A]ye detection] to an option other than [Disable] (☐)

Auto

Automatic selection of the main subject to track from any people, animals, or vehicles in the scene.

People

Detects people and prioritizes detection results for people as the main subjects to track. Detection targets human faces, heads, or bodies, and tracking frames are shown over any face or head detected.

When human faces, heads, or bodies cannot be detected, the camera may track other parts of their body.

Animals

Detects animals (dogs, cats, birds, or horses) and people, with animal detection results given priority to determine main subjects to track.

For animals, the camera attempts to detect faces or bodies, and a tracking frame is shown over any face detected.

When an animal's face or entire body cannot be detected, the camera may track part of their body.

Vehicles

Detects vehicles (sports cars and motorcycles, aircraft, and trains) and people, with vehicle detection results given priority to determine main subjects to track.

For vehicles, the camera attempts to detect key details or the entire vehicle (or for trains, the front part), and a tracking frame is shown over any of these details detected.

When key details or the entire vehicle cannot be detected, the camera may track other parts of the vehicle.

Press the button to enable or disable Spot detection for key details of vehicles.

None

The camera determines the main subject automatically from how you compose shots, without detecting subjects.

Tracking frames are not displayed.

Caution

The following kinds of subjects may not be detected.

• Extremely small or large subjects, subjects that are too bright or too dark, partially hidden subjects, subjects that are difficult to distinguish from the background, or subjects obscured by rain, snow, or dust clouds.

• People's posture or the color or shape of what they are wearing may prevent detection. Tracking frames may also appear for subjects other than people. The camera may not detect dogs, cats, birds, or horses, depending on the breed, color, shape, or posture. Tracking frames may also appear for similar-looking animals or non-animal subjects. The camera may not detect two- or four-wheeled vehicles, aircraft, or trains, depending on the type, color, shape, or orientation. Tracking frames may also appear for similar-looking vehicles or subjects that are not vehicles.

Note

- When pressing the shutter button halfway for subject selection, you can choose the following subjects. In scenes without relevant subjects, the camera tracks other objects regardless of the [Subject to detect] setting.

• Auto: People, animals, vehicles - People: People - Animals: Animals, people - Vehicles: Vehicles, people

In [AF subject to detect], you can limit the available detection setting options to your preferred options. - If it seems difficult for the camera to detect your preferred subject when you are shooting people, animals, or vehicles with [Auto], it may be easier if you switch to the setting option specifically for that subject. - To restrict AF to your specified AF area, set [AF: whole area tracking Servo AF] to [Off] and [AF: Subject to detect] to [None].

Manually selecting a subject for focus

1. Check the tracking frame.

- Aim the camera at the subject. An AF point (or Zone AF frame) appears on the screen if you have set [AF area] to an option other than [Whole area AF]. In this case, aim the AF point over the subject.

A tracking frame [] appears over any subjects detected.

- Tracking frames [] away from AF points are displayed in gray, except in some cases.

Once the tracked subject is near an AF point, even if it is outside the AF point, the tracking frame turns white (distinguishing it as an active frame), which enables selection as the main subject.

Gray display of tracking frames [] does not apply in movie recording.

2. Focus and shoot/record.

A tracking frame is displayed (in green for One-Shot AF or blue for Servo AF) when you press the shutter button halfway, and the camera beeps (only for One-Shot AF).

An orange tracking frame indicates that the camera could not focus on subjects.

Note

- Selecting a subject by touch with [AF: AF area] set to [Whole area AF] changes the tracking frame to [] and locks on to that subject for tracking across the entire screen.

To release locked tracking, tap [] OFF

- Pressing the shutter button halfway when the AF point does not overlap the tracking frame [] will focus using the AF point.

The active [] may cover part of the subject instead of the entire subject.

The size of tracking frames varies depending on the subject.

Even if you have manually selected an AF area, you can switch the AF area to [Whole area AF] and start AF with subject detection by pressing the button assigned to [AF on detected subject] in [●: Customize buttons for shooting].

Caution

In still photo shooting, tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF operation setting. - If the subject's face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be possible. Adjust the focus manually ( ) so that the face can be detected, then perform AF. - AF may not detect subjects or people's faces at the edges of the screen. Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the center.

You can shoot with the eyes of people or animals in focus.

1. Select [AEye detection] ( , ).
2. Select an option.

Disable

Eye detection is not performed.

Auto

The eye for AF operation is selected automatically after eye detection.

Right eye/Left eye

Gives priority to the selected eye for AF, after eye detection. If the eye on the side with priority is not detected, the other eye is used for AF.

3. Aim the camera at the subject.

A tracking frame is displayed around their eye. To choose an eye to focus on when [AF area] is set to [Whole area AF], either tap the screen or use < >. As you use < >, the tracking frame changes again to []. - You can also tap the screen to choose an eye, when [AF area] is set to [Whole area AF] or during tracking in progress. - If your selected eye is not detected, an eye to focus on is selected automatically.

4. Take the picture.

Caution

• Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, subject eyes may not be detected correctly, or a subject's left or right eye may not be prioritized correctly.
• Eyes are not detected when [Subject to detect] is set to [None].

Note

In [AFR eye detection], you can limit the available detection setting options to your preferred options.

Soccer, volleyball, or basketball players you are shooting can be treated as priority subjects for detection and AF tracking, based on typical movements (actions) in each sport.

Caution

- Unintended tracking may occur if this feature is used for other sports or general photography.

Note

● Available under the following conditions.

• Still photo shooting • [ASubject to detect]: [People] • [Shutter mode]: [Electronic]
• Select [A]fction Priority] ().
• Configure [Action Priority].

- Select [Enable], then press < >.

3. Select [Sport events].

4. Select an option.

- Select a sport, then press < ∞ .

Caution

- The following kinds of subjects may not be recognized as priority subjects based on their movement.

• Small subjects
• Too bright or dark
• Partially hidden or outside the angle of view
• Facing away from the camera
• Difficult to distinguish from the background
• Obscured by rain, snow, or dust clouds
• Wearing uniforms that make it difficult to determine their posture
• Crowded together, in front of/behind each other
• In scenes where the ball is not visible or only partly visible
• Greatly out of focus
• Under flickering light

The camera may switch subjects to track players moving similarly to the actions targeted by Action Priority (such as feinting a kick in soccer).

- When several subjects are moving in typical ways at once, Action Priority may cause the camera to switch subjects repeatedly.

- Action Priority may cause the camera to switch subjects repeatedly when several players are near the ball.

- The camera may switch to other subjects near a ball, even if they are not moving in typical ways.

Note

For details on actions that can be recognized, refer to the AF Setting Guide. (9) Operation is as follows with [A Action Priority] set to [Enable].

- Tracking switches to subjects moving in typical ways once they are recognized, even if a different subject was being tracked. However, Action Priority does not switch subjects if you start tracking with touch or button operations.

- Even with [Register people priority] set to [Enable], the camera prioritizes switching based on Action Priority.

- You can assign [Enable] or [Off] in [AF: Action Priority] to any button in [☑]. Customize buttons for shooting] (☐)

With [AF: Whole area tracking Servo AF] set to [Off], the camera only switches subjects within the AF area.

You can press a button assigned to [Start/stop whole area AF tracking] in [ ]. Customize buttons for shooting] to track subjects with a tracking frame []. This example is based on assigning the < > button().

1. Check the AF point.

The AF point (1) will appear. With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed. With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.

2. Press the < >Button.

- The AF point changes to a tracking frame [], which locks on to that subject for tracking and follows the subject within the screen if it moves. To cancel tracking, press the < AF-ON> button again.

The tracking frame changes to [] when multiple subjects can be detected, and you can use < > to choose a subject to focus on.

Once tracking begins, the subject is tracked across the entire screen, regardless of the specified AF area.

The position of AF areas and points when tracking stops after you press the shutter button halfway or completely corresponds to the position of the tracking frame during tracking. The position of AF areas and points when tracking stops during shooting standby corresponds to the position before tracking.

3. Take the picture.

You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, Flexible Zone AF 1 screens are used as an example.

1. Check the AF point.

(1)

The AF point (1) will appear. With Expand AF area: or Expand AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are also displayed. With Flexible Zone AF, the specified Zone AF frame is displayed.

2. Move the AF point.

Use < × to move the AF point into position for focusing (but note that with some lenses, it may not move to the edge of the screen). You can also focus by tapping a position on the screen. - To center the AF point or Zone AF frame, press < > straight in or tap [☐]. - You can resize Zone AF frames used for Flexible Zone AF (☐)

3. Focus and take the picture.

Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway.

• When focus is achieved, the AF point turns blue.
• If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange.

Caution

• The camera will keep moving the AF point [☐] to track subjects when set to Flexible Zone AF and Servo AF, but under some shooting conditions (such as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track the subject.
• Focusing may be difficult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select an AF point in the center.
• Tapping the screen to focus will focus with [One-Shot AF], regardless of the AF operation setting.

Note

- You can set AF areas and AF points when [AF orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt] (☐)

You can resize the Zone AF frame displayed for Flexible Zone AF 1–3.

1. Press the < □> button during shooting screen display.
2. Press the < RATE.

1. Adjust the Zone AF frame size.

- Use the < > or < > dial to adjust the Zone AF frame size, then press < SET>.

To restore the default setting, press the < > button.

You can register the position of a frequently used AF point. To switch from the current AF point to your registered AF point, you can use a button you assign to recalling the home position on advanced setting screens for [Direct AF point selection], [Metering and AF start], [Switch to registered AF point], or [Register/recall shooting func] in [ ] . Customize buttons for shooting] ( )

1. Select your preferred AF area.

• Press the < > button to select an AF area.
• Move the AF point or Zone AF frame to the position to register.

2. Register the AF point or Zone AF frame.

• Hold down the < > button and press the < > button, or press and hold the < ⚙> button, so that the camera beeps and registers the AF point. The registered AF point blinks in gray.
• Registration when the camera is set to Whole area AF will register the entire AF area as the home position.

Note

To clear registered AF points, hold down the < > button and press the < > button, or press and hold the < > button. MODE - You can also clear registered AF points by clearing all camera settings. - You can register separate home positions for each camera orientation when the orientation-linked AF point setting (i) is set to [Separate AF pts: Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only]. Although it has no effect if you attempt to register a home position while a subject is being tracked with a tracking frame, you can clear registered positions at this time.

To check the focus, you can magnify display by approx. 6× or 15× by pressing the < > button (or tapping [Q].

Magnification is centered on the tracking frame when the tracking frame is white (as an active frame) after subject detection. Magnification is centered on the AF point (in the center of the screen) when subjects are detected and the tracking frame is gray, or when subjects cannot be detected. - Autofocusing is performed in magnified view if you press the shutter button halfway. - When set to Servo AF or AI Focus AF, pressing the shutter button halfway in magnified view reverts to the normal view for focusing.

Caution

• If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform AF.
• If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate focus may not be achieved.
• AF speed differs between the normal view and magnified view.
• Preview AF and Movie Servo AF are not available in magnified view. With the magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. - Image brightness may change before and after autofocusing. - Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease. - If the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may flicker, and focusing may be difficult. In this case, restart the camera and resume shooting with AF under the light source you will use. If focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually ( ) For subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus, then recompose the shot before shooting. - With certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or accurate focusing may not be achieved.

• Subjects with low contrast, such as a blue sky or flat surfaces in solid colors, or other cases when highlight or shadow details are clipped. Subjects in low light.
• Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
• Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.). • Fine lines and subject outlines. Under light sources with constantly changing brightness, colors, or patterns. Night scenes or points of light. The image flickers under fluorescent or LED lighting. • Extremely small subjects.
• Subjects at the edge of the screen.
• Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with highly reflective surfaces, etc.). Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage, etc.).
• Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to camera shake or subject blur.
• Performing AF when the subject is very far out of focus.
• Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens. A special effect filter is used.
• Noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens used and settings such as aspect ratio, movie recording size, and Movie digital IS.

Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis) ☆ Focus Guide

You can magnify display to check the focus when you are focusing manually.

1. Set the focus mode to MF.

- For RF lenses with a focus mode switch Set the lens's focus mode switch to < MF

- For RF lenses without a focus mode switch Set [AFocus mode] to [MF].

2. Focus manually.

Turn the lens focusing ring to set the approximate focus.

3. Magnify the image.

- Each press of the < > button changes the magnification ratio, as follows.

4. Move the magnified area.

- Use < *to move the magnified area into position for focusing.

To center the magnified area, press < >straight in.

5. Adjust the focus position.

- While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

After focusing, press the < > button to return to the normal view.

Note

In magnified view, the exposure is locked. Even when focusing manually, you can use Touch Shutter to shoot.

Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge detection.

1. Select [ANF peaking settings] ( , ).
2. Select [Peaking].

- Select [On].

1. Set [Level] and [Color].

Set as necessary.

Caution

In magnified view, peaking display is not shown. During HDMI output, peaking display is not shown on equipment connected via HDMI. Note that peaking display is shown on the camera screen when [HDMI display] is set to [+]. MF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [Off].

Note

• Peaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images. MF peaking may be hard to discern under the following settings. Set [HDR/C.Log View Assist.] as needed.

With [Custom Picture] gamma set to [Canon Log 2], [Canon Log 3], or [PQ]

• With [Custom Picture] gamma set to [Canon Log 2], [Canon Log 3], or [PQ]
• Setting [AF: Focus guide] to [On] provides a guide frame that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. You can also use eye control to display the focus guide at your preferred position. For details, see Using Eye Control for AF.

Setting [AF: Focus guide] to [On] provides a guide frame that shows which direction to adjust focus and the extent of adjustment needed. You can also use eye control to display the focus guide at your preferred position. For details, see Using Eye Control for AF.

1. Select [AFocus guide] ( , ).
2. Select [On].

The guide frame is displayed on the face of any person detected as the main subject. - To display the guide frame on the face of the person detected as the main subject, set [ASubject to detect] to an option other than [None]. You can also display the guide frame near the eyes of the person detected as the main subject by setting [AEye detection] to an option other than [Disable]. After pressing the < > button, you can use < > to move the guide frame in the direction you press (except in [mode]). To set the guide frame after moving it with < *press <>. - You can also move and set the guide frame by tapping the screen. To center the guide frame, tap [] or press <> straight in.

The guide frame indicates the current position in focus and adjustment amount as follows.

Toward infinity

Much adjustment needed

Toward infinity

Slight adjustment needed

In focus

Toward close range

Slight adjustment needed

Toward close range Much adjustment needed

Adjustment information not detected

Caution

Under difficult shooting conditions for AF (the guide frame may not be displayed correctly. ● Higher aperture values are more likely to prevent correct guide frame display. No AF points are displayed while the guide frame is displayed. The guide frame is not displayed in these situations. - When the focus mode is set to AF ( ) - When display is magnified The guide frame is not displayed correctly during shifting or tilting of TS-E lenses.

Note

- The camera's auto power off counter does not count time spent adjusting the focus with a lens's electronic focusing ring.

Registering Faces Changing or Removing the Priority of Registered People Enabling Detection of Registered People's Faces Clearing All Registered People Saving and Loading Registered Data

You can register people on the camera to have the camera attempt to detect their faces and prioritize focusing, brightness, and color tone for them when you shoot. To register a face, you can take a picture of someone, or you can use an image on the card.

Caution

• The camera stores face images and related information registered using this feature. Delete all registered information before disposing of the camera or transferring ownership.
• When using this feature, be aware of the need to protect personal information and comply with privacy regulations, as by asking people for their consent before registering their information. Canon cannot be held liable for any personal information issues arising from use of this feature.

Registering people by taking their picture

1. Select [AFRegister people priority] ( , ). ✅️ ☑️
2. Select [Photograph people and register].

3. Aim the frame over the face of a person to register, then take their picture.

● Shoot under ample light with the subject facing you. - Ask subjects to pose with a natural facial expression before you shoot. For best results, ask subjects to take off any hats, masks, sunglasses, or other coverings before you take their picture. It may improve detection accuracy to register faces immediately before you will shoot. Under these shooting conditions, detection may be less accurate, and it may not be possible to register faces.

• Faces are too small, relative to the frame
• Faces are partially shaded
• Faces are partially hidden

- Faces are displayed on a computer or smartphone screen

4. Select [OK].

The image displayed may look different from how you composed the shot in step 3, but this will not affect detection accuracy.

Registering people from images on the card

JPEG or HEIF images can be used. Process any RAW images you will use into JPEGs or HEIFs before saving them to the card.

Caution

- With the following images, detection may be less accurate, and it may not be possible to register faces.

• Faces are partially hidden
• Faces are partially shaded
• Faces are displayed on a computer or smartphone screen

Note

For best results, make sure that faces in the images meet these guidelines.

• Well lit and facing you - Not wearing any hats, masks, sunglasses, or other coverings • Natural facial expression - Faces are not too small or large relative to the screen

1. Select [Reg. people from image on card].

2. Switch to playback.

Press <

3. Select a face.

For pictures that show more than one person, you can use the < > < > dials or < > to move the orange frame over the face to register. - Press <

4. Select [OK].

After the following screen appears, you can register another person's face.

Display when registered faces are detected

A white frame with [ ] appears on any registered faces that are detected on the shooting screen. Note that [ ] is not displayed when One-Shot AF or Servo AF is used.

Caution

- Detection may be less accurate under these conditions.

• Subjects are not directly facing you
• Faces are too light or dark
• Faces are too small or large relative to the screen
• Subjects have a much different facial expression from the one in registered images
• Subjects are moving too much
• Faces are covered by a hat, mask, sunglasses, or other objects
• Subject faces look much different from how they look in registered images

- Unregistered people may be mistakenly detected as registered people whom they resemble.

- If faces of registered people are not detected, or if detection is not accurate, try clearing the registered information and registering it again.

Note

- When [AF: Subject to detect] is set to an option other than [People], priority is given to the subject specified in that setting.

You can change detection priority by rearranging registered people. You can also remove registered people.

Changing detection priority

1. Select [Change/del. priority of reg. people].

2. Select the face of a registered person.

- Select with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.

3. Change the priority.

Move with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.

- When finished changing priority, press the < > button.

Removing registered people

1. Select the face of a registered person.

- Select with the < > < > dials or < >, then press < >.

2. Press the <☐> button.

3. Select [OK].

- Press the < > button to exit.

1. Select [Register people priority].

2. Select [Enable].

Delete all registered information before disposing of the camera or transferring ownership.

1. Select [Delete all registered people].

2. Press <

3. Select [OK].

Press <

Note

- Performing [Factory reset] in [♀: Reset camera] also clears the information for all registered people.

Registered face data can be saved to a card. Registered data on a card can be used with other EOS R5 Mark II or EOS R1 cameras. You can also use registered data from other EOS R5 Mark II or EOS R1 cameras.

1. Select [Save/load registered data on card].

2. Select [Save registration data on card].

- Select [Save registration data on card] to save the camera's registered data to the card.

- To rename the registered data file before saving it, press the < INFO button on the following screen.

• To load registered data from the card and overwrite existing data on the camera, select [Load from card (overwrite)]. Any existing registered data on the camera is deleted. To add registered data from the card to the camera, select [Load from card (add)]. No existing registered data on the camera is deleted.

- Registered data is loaded starting from the person with the highest priority.

- Once the camera is full of registered data, no more data is loaded.

Case Auto

Case Manual

Shooting with optimal Servo AF for your subject or shooting situation is easy.

Case Auto

You can set Servo AF tracking parameters (subject tracking sensitivity and acceleration/deceleration tracking) for the subject and shooting situation.

1. Select [AFase Auto].

Turn the < > dial to select [AUTO], then press < >. The case is set to auto and [AUTO] is displayed in blue.

2. Adjust [Case Auto character].

- Press the < > button. The selected parameter is outlined in purple.

- Press < > to select [Case Auto character].

To select an adjustment value, use the < > or < > dial. Default settings are indicated by a light gray [] icon. - Press < ≥ when finished.

- Press the < R> button to return to the screen in step 1.

Case Auto tracking parameters

It may be easier to focus if you modify the default Case Auto setting.

0

Standard setting. Generally recommended, as an option that is useful in many situations.

- Locked on: -1

Keeps the tracked subject in focus as much as possible, even if objects are momentarily in front of it, or if it strays from AF points after moving suddenly.

Responsive: +1

Makes it easier for the camera to switch tracked subjects if you want to capture several subjects in succession, for example.

You can set Servo AF tracking parameters as needed for shooting conditions.

1. Select [ACase Manual].

Turn the < > dial to select [M], then press < >. The case is set to manual and [M] is displayed in blue.

2. Adjust [Case Manual] tracking parameters.

- Press the < > button. The selected parameter is outlined in purple.

- Use the < > or < > dial to select a setting to adjust, then press < ▶7

To select an adjustment value, use the < > or < > dial. Default settings are indicated by a light gray [] icon. - Press < > when finished.

- Press the < > button to return to the screen in step 1.

Tracking sensitivity

Setting for Servo AF subject-tracking sensitivity in response to non-subjects moving across AF points or subjects straying from AF points.

0

Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.

- Locked on: -2 / -1

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if non-subjects move across AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The -2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target subject longer than the -1 setting.

However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.

Responsive: +2 / +1

The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you want to always focus on the closest subject.

The +2 setting is more responsive than the +1 setting when focusing on the next subject.

However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended subject.

Acceleration/deceleration tracking

Setting for subject-tracking sensitivity in response to sudden, significant changes in speed, as when subjects suddenly start or stop moving.

0

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).

-2 / -1

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed). Effective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due to slight subject movement or an obstruction in front of the subject.

+2 / +1

Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject's speed suddenly changes significantly, the camera continues to focus on the target subject. For example, the camera is less likely to focus behind a subject that suddenly starts approaching you, or in front of an approaching subject that suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track dramatic changes in the moving subject's speed better than with +1.

However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of the subject, focusing may become unstable for short periods.

[Customize AF operation] [Customized controls] [MF related] [Various settings/Various settings] [Subject detection] (in movie recording) [Servo AF character.] (in movie recording) ☆

You can configure AF functions in detail to suit your shooting style or subject.

Servo 1st image priority☆

You can set AF operating characteristics and shutter-release timing for the first shot with Servo AF.

- □/◎: Equal priority

Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter-release timing.

- □: Release

Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved. Useful when you want to give priority to capturing the decisive moment rather than achieving focus.

: Focus

Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image.

Note

- The second and subsequent shots in continuous shooting prioritize the release timing.

One-Shot AF release priority☆

You can specify whether to prioritize focus or release timing for One-Shot AF (except when shooting with Touch Shutter).

: Focus

The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved. Useful when you want to achieve focus before capturing the image.

□: Release

Prioritizes shutter release over focus. Useful when capturing the decisive moment is most important.

Note that the camera shoots whether or not the subject is in focus.

Preview AF

Keeps subjects generally in focus before you start shooting. When set to [Enable], the camera is ready to focus immediately after you press the shutter button halfway.

Caution

Fewer shots are available when set to [Enable], because the lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.

Lens operation when AF is not available☆

You can specify lens operation that applies when autofocusing on a subject is not possible.

ON: Continue focus search

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise focus.

OFF: Stop focus search

If autofocus starts and the focus is far off or if focus cannot be achieved, the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the lens from becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search drive.

Caution

- [Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses or other lenses that are driven over a large focus area, to avoid significant delay from focus search drive if the lens becomes greatly out of focus.

AF-assist beam firing

You can enable or disable AF-assist beam firing of the camera or a Speedlite for EOS cameras.

ON: Enable

Enables firing of the AF-assist beam, when needed.

OFF: Disable

Disables firing of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to fire the AF-assist beam.

LED: LED AF assist beam only

Enables LED AF-assist beam firing by Speedlites equipped with this feature, when these flash units are attached. If your Speedlite is not LED-equipped, the camera's AF-assist beam is fired instead.

Caution

- Speedlite AF-assist beam firing is disabled when the Speedlite's [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to [Disable].

Limit AF areas

You can limit the AF areas available to the areas that you normally use. Select available AF areas and press < > to add a checkmark []. Select [OK] to register the setting. For details on AF areas, see AF Area.

Caution

The [√] mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.

Note

- An asterisk to the right of [Limit AF areas] indicates that the default setting has been modified.

Orientation-linked AF points

You can set separate types of AF areas or positions of AF points for vertical and horizontal shooting.

: Same for both vert/horiz

The same AF points or Zone AF frames in the same AF areas are used in both vertical and horizontal shooting.

Separate AF pts: Area+pt

Separate types of AF areas or separate AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for each camera orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical with the camera grip down).

Useful when switching to other types of AF areas or positions of AF points or Zone AF frames automatically based on camera orientation.

AF areas and AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three camera orientations are retained.

Separate AF pts: Pt only

Separate AF points or Zone AF frames can be set for each camera orientation ((1) Horizontal, (2) Vertical with the camera grip up, (3) Vertical with the camera grip down). Useful when switching to other positions of AF points or Zone AF frames automatically based on camera orientation.

Positions of AF points or Zone AF frames you assign to each of the three camera orientations are retained.

Caution

The default setting of [Same for both vert/horiz] is restored if you select [Basic settings] in [♀: Reset camera] (☑ Settings for orientations (1)–(3) are cleared, and the camera is set to use the center Zone AF frame in Flexible Zone AF 1.

The setting may be cleared if you switch lenses.

Limit subject to detect

You can limit the available setting options in [AS]ubject to detect] to your preferred options. Select an option to exclude and press < to clear [ ]. Select [OK] to register the setting.

Caution

The [√]mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.

Note

An asterisk to the right of [A]imit subject to detect] indicates that the default setting has been modified.

Left/right eye detection

You can limit the available setting options in [AEye detection] to your preferred options. Select an option to exclude and press < SET> to clear [√]. Select [OK] to register the setting.

Caution

The [√]mark cannot be cleared from all items at the same time.

Note

An asterisk to the right of [AFR eye detection] indicates that the default setting has been modified.

Lens electronic MF

For attached lenses that support electronic manual focusing, you can specify the operation of manual focus adjustment.

OFF: Disable

Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens's focus mode switch is set to < AF

- OFF: Disable after One-Shot

After One-Shot AF, manual focusing adjustment is disabled.

ON : One-Shot→enabled

You can manually adjust the focus after the One-Shot AF if you keep holding down the shutter button halfway.

● ☑+ON: One-Shot→enabled (magnify)

You can manually adjust the focus after the One-Shot AF if you keep holding down the shutter button halfway. You can magnify the area in focus and adjust the focus manually by turning the lens focusing ring.

ON: Enable (actual size)

Manual focus adjustment is always available when the camera is on with certain lenses*1 attached.

With other lenses, operation is the same as [One-Shot→enabled].

● ON: Enable (One-Shot→magnify)

Manual focus adjustment is always available when the camera is on with certain lenses *1 attached.

Turning the lens focusing ring after One-Shot AF magnifies the area in focus.

With other lenses, operation is the same as [One-Shot→enabled].

*1: For details on lenses compatible with this feature, check the Canon website (7).

Caution

- With [One-Shot→enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnified even if you turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway immediately after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the shutter button, waiting for [Q] display, then pressing the shutter button halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring.

Note

- For details on your lens's manual focus specifications, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual.

Register/recall AF-related settings

You can save current AF settings and apply them all at once.

Caution

• Current camera settings are listed on the screen in step 4, which is used to register settings. The items listed on this screen cannot be changed. The following [ ] tab items are not available for this feature.

• One-Shot AF release priority - Preview AF - AF-assist beam firing - MF peaking settings - Focus guide

Register

1. Select [AFRegister/recall AF-related settings] ().
2. Select [Register settings].

3. Select a name for the settings.

[1] is displayed by names for which AF settings have not been registered yet. To rename the settings, press the < > button.

4. Select the AF settings to register.

All selected AF settings will be registered. To clear or reselect settings, turn the < > dial to select the setting, then press < >. SET - When you are finished choosing settings, select [OK].

Recall

1. Select [AFRegister/recall AF-related settings] ().
2. Select [Recall].

1. Select a name for the settings.

- Turn the < > dial to select a name, then press < > to confirm your selection.

1. Review the registered details and select [OK].

- You can use < *to scroll the screen when reviewing registered details.

AF Setting Guide URL

Select [AF Setting Guide URL] () to display the QR code. Scan the QR code with your smartphone to access the AF Setting Guide.

Switching tracked subjects

You can set how easily the camera switches tracked subjects.

Standard

After determining the main subject from how your shot is composed, the camera tracks subjects or switches to others accordingly.

- Locked on

Switches tracked subjects later than with [Standard].

- Responsive

Switches tracked subjects sooner than with [Standard].

Caution

Subjects selected by touch operations are tracked to the extent possible, regardless of the [Switching tracked subjects] setting.

Movie Servo AF speed

You can set the AF speed for Movie Servo AF. This function is enabled with [Movie Servo AF] in [AF: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable] when you are using lenses compatible with slow focus transition during movie recording.*

You can adjust the AF speed (focus transition speed) from the standard speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels) or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the desired effect for the movie creation.

* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie recording

USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For details, refer to the Canon website (

Caution

With certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not change.

Note

Operation when inactive is equivalent to when [AF speed] is set to [Standard (0)]. - An AF speed value to the right of [Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the default setting has been modified.

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity

You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which affects responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.

This function is available when [Movie Servo AF] in [AF: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable].

- Locked on: -3/-2/-1

With this setting, the camera is less likely to track a different subject if the subject strays from the AF point. The closer the setting is to the minus (−) symbol, the less the camera is inclined to track a different subject. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.

• Responsive: +1/+2/+3

This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol, the more responsive the camera is. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.

Note

Operation when inactive is equivalent to when set to [0].

You can set your preferred focus positions in advance on the camera when using RF or RF-S lenses. Saved focus preset positions can be applied by pressing a button during standby.

Registering a focus position on the camera

Focus at the focusing distance to register as a preset, then press the button assigned to [Register focus preset].

Recalling preset focus positions

Press the button assigned to [Recall focus preset].

Caution

Before using focus presetting, you must assign [Register focus preset] and [Recall focus preset] to buttons of your choice in [💡: Customize buttons for shooting].

Note

• Focus presetting is available in AF and MF focus mode.
• Registered focus positions are cleared when you switch lenses or change camera batteries.

Switching Continuous Shooting Modes

Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject.

1. Press the <M> button with an image displayed on the screen. 2. Select the drive mode item. - Press the < > button to select the drive mode item. 3. Select the drive mode. - Turn the < > dial to make a selection. - □: Single shooting: When you hold down the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken. - ● ☐: High-speed continuous shooting: When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [Shutter mode] setting. - [Mechanical]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec. - [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 12 shots/sec. - [Electronic ES]: max. approx. 30 shots/sec. - H: High-speed continuous shooting: When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [Shutter mode] setting. - [Mechanical]: max. approx. 6 shots/sec. - [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 8.2 shots/sec. - [Electronic]: max. approx. 15 shots/sec. - : Low-speed continuous shooting: When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously as described below while you keep holding it down, based on the [Shutter mode] setting. - [Mechanical]: max. approx. 3 shots/sec. - [Elec. 1st-curtain]: max. approx. 3 shots/sec. - [Electronic]: max. approx. 5 shots/sec. - Self-timer: 10 sec. / Self-timer: 2 sec. / : Self-timer: Continuous shooting. For details on [V][I], see Using the Self-Timer. Caution: - [T] enables approx. 30 shots/sec. continuous shooting speed when set to [Electronic] under these conditions: - Shutter speed: 1/250 sec. or faster - Flicker reduction: None - Note that the continuous shooting speed may be slower than 30 shots/sec. if any of the following occurs, or after certain operations in continuous shooting: - Switching to [P] or [Tv] shooting mode, or applying settings that cause the aperture value to change in [Fv] mode - Zooming is performed - Manual focusing is performed - Servo AF changes the position in focus - A power source other than Battery Pack LP-E6P or DC Coupler DR-E6P is used - Various factors may lower the continuous shooting speed, such as battery level, temperature, shutter speed, aperture value, subject conditions, brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of flash, and shooting settings. - Visit the Canon website for details on lenses supporting the maximum continuous shooting speed. - Continuous shooting speed with Servo AF may be slower depending on subject conditions or the lens used. - The continuous shooting speed will be slower when shooting under flickering light. - When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed may drop off because shooting will be temporarily disabled. - Continuous shooting speed may be slower and image display in the viewfinder or on the screen may stop under some shooting conditions. Note: - Continuous shooting speed indicated for each drive mode is the speed under default camera settings. When using the electronic shutter, you can set the continuous shooting speed for each drive mode in [Continuous shooting speed]. - In electronic shutter mode, you can temporarily change the continuous shooting mode by pressing the button assigned to [Switch cont. shooting modes] in [Customize buttons for shooting]. This example is based on assigning [Switch cont. shooting modes] to the < > button. 1. Assign [Switch cont. shooting modes] to the < > button. - Select [Switch cont. shooting modes], then press the < > INFO button. - Select the continuous shooting mode to assign to the button, then press < >. 2. During standby, press the < > button. In [ ] or [ ] drive mode, you can switch to [ ] continuous shooting for as long as you press the button. Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. 1. Press the < > button with an image displayed on the screen. 2. Select the drive mode item. - Press the < > button to select the drive mode item. 3. Select the self-timer. - Turn the < > dial to select the self-timer. - #10: Shoot in 10 sec. - Q2: Shoot in 2 sec. - ©: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for the specified number of shots*. * Set the number of shots taken continuously (2–10), either in [Drive mode] or on the Quick Control screen. 4. Take the picture. - Focus on the subject, then press the shutter button completely. - To check operation, look at the self-timer lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the countdown in seconds on the screen. - Self-timer lamp blinking accelerates and the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec. before the picture is taken. Note: - [●] is used to start shooting without touching the camera (to avoid camera shake) when it is mounted on a tripod for shots such as still lifes or long exposures, for example. - After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image to check focus and exposure is recommended. - When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock on an object at the same distance as where you will stand. - To cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press < >. - Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control shooting. Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 For remote control shooting, you can use an optional Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (Bluetooth) or an optional Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both wired). Wireless Remote Control BR-E1: - You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. First, pair the camera and BR-E1. - For operating instructions, refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual. Note: - Auto power off time may be extended when the camera is set for remote control shooting. - BR-E1 can also be used for movie recording. Remote Switch RS-80N3 / Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3: - Once connected to the camera, the switch enables you to shoot remotely over a wired connection. - For operating instructions, refer to the accessory instruction manual. 1. Open the terminal cover. 2. Connect the plug to the remote control terminal. This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings on the playback [▶] tab. Caution: - Normal display or configuration on this camera may not be possible for images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that have been edited or renamed on a computer. - Images that cannot be used with playback functions may be displayed. - Tab Menus: Playback - Image Playback - Magnified Image Display - Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) - Voice Memo Recording and Playback - Movie Playback - 4K/8K Movie Frame Grab - Playback on a TV Set - Protecting Images - Erasing Images - Rotating Still Photos - Changing Movie Orientation Information - Rating Images - Copying Still Photos - Print Ordering (DPOF) - RAW Image Processing - In-Camera Upscaling - Resizing JPEG/HEIF Images - Cropping JPEG/HEIF Images - Converting HEIF to JPEG - Slide Show - VR Preview - Setting Image Search Conditions - Resuming from Previous Playback - Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection - Customizing Playback Information Display - Displaying the Highlight Alert - AF Point Display - Playback Grid - Movie Play Count - File operation: (1) Protect images (2) Erase images (3) Rotate stills (4) Change mov rotate info (5) Rating (6) Image copy (7) Print order - Image processing: (1) RAW image processing (2) In-Camera Upscaling (3) Resize (4) Cropping (5) HEIF→JPEG conversion Caution: - [RAW image processing] and [HEIF→JPEG conversion] are not displayed in [A] or [ ] mode. - Playback method: (1) Slide show (2) VR preview (3) Set image search conditions (4) View from last seen (5) Magnification (6) Blur/Out-of-Focus image detection - Various settings: (1) Playback information display (2) Highlight alert (3) AF point disp. (4) Playback grid (5) Movie play count (6) Memo audio quality Single-Image Display Shooting Information Display Touch Playback Single-Image Display: 1. Switch to playback. - Press the < > button. - The last image captured or played back is displayed. 2. Browse images. - Turn the < > dial to browse images. Movies and still photos are displayed one after another regardless of which was captured first. - Press the < > button to play the most recent movie, or to display the still photo numbered with the highest file number and stored in the folder with the highest folder number. - Each time you press the < > button, the display will change. - No information / Basic information display / Shooting information display. 3. Exit image playback. - Press the < > button to exit image playback and return to shooting standby. Note: - Lines indicating the image area are shown on RAW images captured with [Cropping/aspect ratio] set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)]. - If the search conditions are set with [Set image search conditions], only the filtered images will be displayed. - When played back, images captured with [Add cropping information] set to an option other than [Disable] are displayed with lines indicating the image area. With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press < > up or down to view other information. You can also customize the information displayed, in [Playback information display]. The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones and similar devices. First, press the < > button to prepare for touch playback. Browse images / Jump display / Index display / Magnified view. Note: - You can also magnify display by double-tapping with one finger. Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio Setting the Initial Magnification Position Magnification for Subsequent Images You can magnify display of your captured images. 1. Magnify the image. - Turn the < > dial clockwise. - The magnified view will appear. The position of the magnified area is displayed in the lower right of the screen. - To magnify images, turn the < > dial clockwise. - To reduce magnification, turn the < > dial counterclockwise. For index display, keep turning the dial. 2. Scroll the image. - Use < > to scroll around the magnified image. - Press the < > or < > button to exit magnified view. Note: - To switch to other images while maintaining magnified view, turn the < > dial. - Magnification is not available for movies. - You can also magnify images by pressing < > straight in, which has the same effect as the < > button. You can set the initial magnification ratio. 1. Select [Magnification]. 2. Select [Magnificatn (apx)]. 3. Select an option. - 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x: Magnified view starts at the selected magnification ratio. - Actual size: Displays images essentially full-size, based on their pixels. - Same as last: Magnified view resumes from the same ratio as the last time you exited magnified view with the < > or < > button. You can set the initial magnification position. 1. Select [Magnification]. 2. Select [Magnified position]. 3. Select an option. - From center: Magnified view starts from the center of the screen. - From focus pt: Magnified view starts from the AF point in focus. If the photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts from the center of the screen. You can specify whether to maintain the same position for magnified view or to use the position set in [Magnified position] when displaying subsequent images. 1. Select [Magnification]. 2. Select [Maintain position]. 3. Select an option. - Enable: The current magnified position is maintained when displaying subsequent images in magnified view. - Disable: The position set in [Magnified position] is used when displaying subsequent images in magnified view. 1. Press the < > button. - During image playback, press the < > button. [ ] will be displayed in the lower right of the screen. 2. Switch to the index display. - Turn the < > dial counterclockwise. The 4-image index display will appear. The selected image is highlighted with an orange frame. - Turning the < > dial further counterclockwise will switch the display from 9 to 36 to 100 images. Turning the dial clockwise cycles through 100, 36, 9, 4, and single-image display. 3. Browse images. - Use < > or the < > dial to move the orange frame for image selection. - Press < > in the index display to display the selected image in the single-image display. Recording Voice Memos Memo Audio Quality Playing Voice Memos You can add (record) voice memos to your shots. Voice memos are recorded as WAV audio files with the same file number as the image. They can be played back by the camera or a computer. Recording Voice Memos: 1. Switch to playback. 2. Select an image to add a voice memo to. - Turn the < > dial to select an image to add a voice memo to. 3. Record a voice memo. - Hold down the < RATE > button for approx. 2 sec. - Keep holding down the button after [Recording memo...] appears, and speak into the microphone. Each recording can be up to approx. 30 sec. - To end the voice memo, release the button. - A [icon] icon is displayed at the top of the screen. Caution: - Voice memos cannot be added to movies. - Voice memos cannot be recorded with an external microphone. - Voice memos cannot be added to images during transfer to an FTP server. Note: - Audio quality of voice memo recording can be changed in [Memo audio quality]. - To record voice memos longer than 30 sec., repeat step 3. - You can record a single voice memo during image review (immediately after shooting) by following step 3. You can set the audio quality for recording voice memos. 1. Select [Memo audio quality]. 2. Select an option. - High quality (48 kHz): Enables voice memo recording at the same level of audio quality as movies. - Low quality (8 kHz): Enables smaller voice memo file sizes than with [High quality (48 kHz)]. Caution: - Additional voice memo recording for images with existing voice memos is performed at the same level of audio quality as the first recording, regardless of this setting. This example is based on assigning voice memo playback to the < RATE > button. 1. Assign [Play memo (Hold: Rec. memo)] to the < > button. - Select [Play memo (Hold: Rec. memo)], then press < >. 2. Select an image for voice memo playback. - Press the < > button to switch to image playback. - Turn the < > dial to select an image labeled with a [ ] icon at the top of the screen. 3. Play back the voice memo. - Press the < > button to play back the voice memo through the speaker. - You can adjust the sound volume by turning the < > dial. - To stop playback, press the < > button. Note: - Multiple voice memos added to an image are played back consecutively. - Erasing images also erases any voice memos added to the images. - A voice memo added to an image can be erased without erasing the image. 1. Switch to playback. - Press the < > button. 2. Select a movie. - Turn the < > dial to select a movie to play. - In single-image display, the [SET] displayed in the upper left of the screen indicates a movie. - In index display, perforations at the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a movie. Movies cannot be played back from index display, so press < > to switch to single-image display. 3. In the single-image display, press < >. 4. Play the movie. - Press < > or tap []. - The movie will start playing back. Sound is played through the speaker. - You can pause playback and display the movie playback panel by pressing < >. Press it again to resume playback. - Turn the < > dial to adjust the volume (even during playback). Movie playback panel: - Skip backward: Skips backward approx. 1 sec. each time you press < > left. Holding < > to the left rewinds the movie. - Previous frame: Displays the previous frame each time you turn the < > dial left. - Play: Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop. - Next frame: Displays the next frame each time you turn the < > dial right. - Skip forward: Skips forward approx. 1 sec. each time you press < > right. Holding < > to the right fast-forwards the movie. - Playback position: Playback time (hours:minutes:seconds, when [Movie play count] is set to [Rec time]) or Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames, when [Movie play count] is set to [Time code]). - Volume: Turn the < > dial to adjust the speaker volume (You can also adjust the volume by pressing < > vertically). - Press the < > button to go to the next screen. - Press the < > button to return to single-image display. Controls not on the previous screen are as follows: - Slow motion: Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < > dial. The slow motion speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen. - Frame Grab: Available when you play 4K or 8K movies. Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a JPEG or HEIF still image. - MENU: Press the < > button to return to the previous screen. Caution: - Adjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a television for movie playback (because volume cannot be adjusted by pressing < > up or down). - Movie playback may stop if the card's read speed is too slow or movie files have corrupted frames. From 4K or 8K movies, you can select individual frames to save as JPEG or HEIF still images. This is referred to as "frame grabbing." 1. Select a 4K or 8K movie. - Turn the < > dial to select a movie in 4K or 8K quality. - In index display, press < > to switch to single-image display. 2. In the single-image display, press < >. The movie playback panel will appear. 3. Select a frame to grab. - Use the movie playback panel to select the frame to grab as a still image. - For movie playback panel instructions, see Movie playback panel. 4. Press the < > button. 5. Select [Save as a new still image]. 6. Save. - Select [OK] to save the current frame as a JPEG still image. - HEIF images are saved if you grab frames from movies recorded with [HDR shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ]. - Check the destination folder and image file number. 7. Select the image to display. - Select [View original movie] or [View extracted still image]. Caution: - Frame grabbing is not possible from the following 4K movies, or from 8K movies: - RAW movies - Movies recorded with [Custom Picture] set - Movies recorded with other cameras - Frame grabbing is not possible while the camera is connected to a computer. By connecting the camera to a television with a commercially available HDMI cable, you can play back the captured still photos and movies on the television. If the image does not appear on the TV screen, confirm that [System frequency] is correctly set to [59.94Hz:NTSC] or [50.00Hz:PAL] (depending on the video system of your television). 1. Connect the HDMI cable to the camera. - Use the cable protector and insert the HDMI cable in the camera's HDMI terminal. 2. Connect the HDMI cable to the television's HDMI IN port. 3. Turn on the television and switch the television's video input to select the connected port. 4. Set the camera's power switch to < >. 5. Press the < > button.

Item Playback Operations
[AVT3]Skip backward	< >Skips backward approx. 1 sec. each time you press < > leftHolding < >to the left rewinds the movie.
[2CD2]Previous frame Displays the	previous frame each time you turn the < > dial left.
[7TKW]Play Pressing < > toggles between playback and stop.
[6TTA]Next frame Displays the next	frame each time you turn the < > dial right.
[2TH2]Skip forward	< >Skips forward approx. 1 sec. each time you press < > rightHolding < >to the right fast-forwards the movie.
[6TS9]	Playback position
[XYTW]:mm:ss	Playback time (hours:minutes:seconds, when [Movie play count] is set to [Rec time])
[XXW4]:mm:ss.ff (DF)	Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames, when [Movie play count] is set to [Time code])
[08CS]:mm:ss:ff (NDF)
[30XZ]Volume	Turn the < >dial to adjust the speaker volume (You can also adjust the volume by pressing < >vertically.
[0644]	Press the < >button to go to the next screen ( ).
[7422]ENU	Press the < >button to return to single-image display.

Item Playback Operations
▶ Slow motion	Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the < > dial. The slow motion speed is indicated in the upper right of the screen.
Frame Grab	Available when you play 4K or 8K movies. Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a JPEG or HEIF still image ( )
MENU	Press the < > button to return to the previous screen.

Images are now displayed on the television, with nothing displayed on the camera screen. The images will automatically be displayed at the optimum resolution matching the connected television.

Caution

• Adjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera. Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off the camera and television.
• Depending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
• Do not connect any other device's output to the camera's < HDMI OUT terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Certain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility. It may take some time before images are displayed if the card contains movies recorded with different settings, even if you change the [HDMI resolution] setting.
• Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a television.

Note

It may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [HDMI resolution] to an option other than [Auto] (☐). Note that if the card contains movies recorded with different settings, it may take some time before images are displayed.

Protecting Individual Images via the Menu √ Specifying the Range of Images to Protect Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.

Caution

If you format the card, the protected images will also be erased.

Note

Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the protection. - If you erase all the images, only the protected images will remain. This is convenient when you want to erase all unneeded images at once. - Voice memos can be added to protected images. For images with existing voice memos, additional voice memo recording is also possible.

Protecting Individual Images via the Menu

1. Select [:Protect images] ().
2. Select [Select images].

3. Select the image to protect.

Turn the < > dial to select an image to protect.

4. Protect the image.

- Press < to protect the selected image, after which it will be labeled with a [icon (1) at the top of the screen.

To cancel protection and clear the icon, press <> again.

To protect another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

- Select [Select range] in [:Protect images].

2. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). The images in the specified range will be protected and the [icon] icon will appear. To select another image to protect, repeat step 2.

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

• When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [▶: Protect images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected. To cancel protection, select [Unprotect all images in folder] or [Unprotect all images on card].
• If the search conditions are set with [:Set image search conditions] (), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all found].

• If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be protected.
• If you select [Unprotect all found], the protection of all the filtered images will be canceled.

Note

- Protecting or unprotecting images by selecting [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] applies to the card selected in [#: Record func+card/folder sel.] (in either [Record/play]/[Record/play] or [Play]/[Play]).

Erasing Images Individually, Selecting Multiple Images to Erase Together, Specifying the Range of Images to Erase, Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can either select and erase unnecessary images individually or erase them in one batch. Protected images will not be erased.

Caution

Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images from being erased accidentally, protect them.

Erasing Images Individually

1. Press the <▶> button.
2. Select the image to be erased.

- Turn the <>> dial to select the image to erase.

1. Press the < > button.

4. Erase the images.

JPEG/HEIF/RAW images or movies

Select [Erase].

RAW+JPEG/RAW+HEIF images

• Select an option. For images with voice memos, you can also erase just the voice memo during image playback by selecting [Erase voice memo].
• Series of images captured in [1], [2], or [3] drive mode are erased when you select [Erase scene including image] during playback.

By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once.

1. Select [:Erase images] ().
2. Select [Select and erase images].

1. Select an image.

Turn the < > dial to select an image to erase, then press < >. To select another image to be erased, repeat step 3.

1. Press the <@> button.

5. Erase the images.

Select [OK].

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

- Select [Select range] in [:Erase images].

2. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark will be appended to all the images within the range between the first and last images. To select another image to be erased, repeat step 2.

3. Press the < > button.

4. Erase the images.

Select [OK].

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

• When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [▶: Erase images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
• If the search conditions are set with [:Set image search conditions] (), the display will change to [All found images].

- If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be erased.

Note

To erase all the images including protected images, format the card ( - Erasing images by selecting [All images on card] applies to the card selected in [√: Record func+card/folder sel.] (in either [Record/play] or [Play]).

You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.

1. Select [:Rotate stills] ().
2. Select an image to rotate.

- Turn the < > dial to select the image.

1. Rotate the image.

Each time you press <∞ , the image will rotate clockwise as follows: 90°→270°→0° .

To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Note

• If you set [√: Auto rotate] to [On 📷] (☑) before taking pictures, you need not rotate the image with this function.
• If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image playback, set [Auto rotate] to [On]. Movies cannot be rotated.

Changing Movie Orientation Information

You can manually edit movie playback orientation information (which determines which side is up).

1. Select [:Change mov rotate info] ().
2. Select a movie.

- Turn the < > dial to select a movie with orientation information to change.

1. Change the orientation information.

As you watch the camera and icon in the upper left of the screen, press <SET> to specify which side is up. Each press of <SET> edits the movie rotation information as follows: [ ] → [ ] → [ ].

Caution

Movies are played horizontally on the camera and via HDMI video output, regardless of the [Add rotate info] setting. Movie orientation information of movies recorded with other cameras cannot be edited with this camera.

Rating Individual Images with the <RATE> Button, Rating Individual Images via the Menu, Rating by Specifying the Range, Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 ([*] to [*]). This function is called rating.

Rating images can help you organize them.

Rating Individual Images with the <RATE> Button

1. Select the image to be rated.

• Press the < > button to switch to image playback. Turn the < > dial to select the image to rate.

2. Rate the image.

• Press the <RATE> button. To rate another image, repeat steps 1 and 2.
• Select [ :Rating] ( ).
• Select [Select images].

1. Select the image to be rated.

Turn the < > dial to select the image to be rated.

4. Rate the image.

• Press < ② and a blue highlight frame will appear as shown in the screen above. Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then press < >.
• When you append a rating mark to the image, the number beside the set rating will increase by one. To rate another image, repeat steps 3 and 4.

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once.

1. Select [Select range].

- Select [Select range] in [:Rating].

2. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. • To select other images, repeat step 2.

3. Press the < > button.

4. Rate the image.

- Turn the < > dial to select a rating mark, then select [OK]. All the images in the specified range will be rated (same rating) at once.

You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Under [Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.

Turn the < > dial to select a rating, then select [OK]. - When you are not rating images or canceling the rating, select [OFF]. - If the search conditions are set with [Set image search conditions], the display will change to [All found images].

- If you select [All found images], all the images filtered by the search conditions will be rated as specified.

Note

Values next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have that rating. With [Set image search conditions] and [Image jump w/], you can display only the images given a specific rating.

Copying Individual Images Copying a Range of Images Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can copy the images on one card to the other card to save duplicates.

All images in a folder or on a card can also be copied at the same time.

Caution

Movies recorded by this camera cannot be copied. - For extensive copying, consider using a household power outlet accessory (sold separately). - If the target folder or card already has an image with the same file number, [Skip image and continue], [Replace existing image], and [Cancel copy] are displayed. Select a copying method, then press <

- [Skip image and continue]: Any images with the same file number are skipped and not copied.

- [Replace existing image]: Any images with the same file number (including protected images) are overwritten.

Overwriting images that had print order information (y) will require you to set the print order information again.

- Print order and image transfer information is not included in copies of images.

- Shooting is not possible during the copying process. Select [Cancel] before shooting.

Note

Images are copied from the card selected in [Record func+card/folder sel.] (in either [Record/play] or [Play]). Copies of images have the same file name as the original image. With [Sel.Image], images in multiple folders cannot be copied at the same time. Select images to copy from one folder at a time. - Any voice memos added to images are also copied.

1. Select [ : male copy ] ( ).
2. Select [Sel.Image].

- Check the source and target card numbers and the free space on the target card.

- Select [Sel.Image], then press <

1. Select the folder.

(1) Number of images in folder (2) Lowest file number (3) Folder name (4) Highest file number

- Select the source folder, then press < 1 .

- When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the screen.

4. Select an image to copy.

(1) Total images selected

Turn the < > dial to select an image to copy, then press < >. To select another image to copy, repeat step 4.

5. Press the < > button.

6. Select [OK].

• Check the target card, then select [OK].

7. Select the target folder.

• Select the folder to copy the image to, then press < To create a new folder, select [Create folder].

8. Select [OK].

- Check the information about the source and target card, then select [OK].

Results are displayed after copying is finished. Select [OK] to return to the screen in step 2.

You can copy all specified images at once by selecting the first and last images in a range as you look at images in the index display.

1. Select [Range].

2. Select the folder.

• Select the source folder, then press <
• When selecting the folder, refer to the images displayed at right of the screen.

3. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark will be appended to all the images within the range between the first and last images. To select another image to copy, repeat step 3.

4. Press the < > button.

Images in the specified range are now copied.

You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Selecting [Sel.] or [All images] in [▶: Image copy] copies all the images it contains.

Setting Print Options - Selecting Images for Printing

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher. You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specified for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)

Setting Print Options

1. Select [ :Print order] ( ).
2. Select [Set up].

3. Set the options as desired.

Set [Print type], [Date], and [File No.] options.

Print type		Standard	Prints one image on one sheet.
	[422X]	Index	Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one sheet.
	[220Y][1A4K]	Both	Prints both the standard and index prints.
Date	[X2X8]	[On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.
	[630S]
File No.		[On] imprints the file number.
	[502K]

4. Exit the setting.

• Press the < > button.
• Next, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to specify the images to be printed.

Caution

• If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting, the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In this case, resize the image and then print the index print. Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer. With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the same time.
• When printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specifications are set. You cannot print in the specified print order if you extract just the images from the card for printing. Certain DPOF-compliant printers and photofinishers may not be able to print the images as you specified. When using a printer, refer to the printer's instruction manual. When requesting service from a photofinisher, ask in advance.
• Do not use this camera to configure print settings for images with DPOF settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.

Selecting images

Select and specify the images individually.

Press the < > button to save the print order to the card.

- Standard/Both

(1) Quantity

(2) Total images selected

Press < to print a copy of the displayed image. By turning the < dial, you can set a print quantity of up to 99 copies.

Index

(3) Checkmark

(4) Index icon

Press < SET > to add a checkmark [ ] to the box. The image will be included in the index print.

Selecting multiple images

- Select range

Select [Select range] in [Multiple]. Selecting the first and last images of the range marks all the images in the range with a checkmark [√] and one copy of each image will be specified for printing.

• All images in a folder

Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be specified.

If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images in the folder will be canceled.

• All images on a card

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the card will be specified for printing.

If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images on the card.

If the search conditions are set with [:Set image search conditions] () and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found images].

All found images

If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images filtered by the search conditions will be specified for printing.

If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the filtered images will be cleared.

Caution

RAW/HEIF images and movies cannot be specified for printing. Note that RAW/HEIF images and movies will not be specified for printing even if you specify all images with [Multiple].

Magnified View √ Processing Images with Specified Aspect Ratios RAW Image Processing Options

You can process RAW images with the camera to create JPEG or HEIF images.

RAW images are not affected, so different conditions can be applied to create JPEG or HEIF images.

You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW images.

Caution

- Processing into HEIF is not available for RAW images or captured with expanded ISO speed (L or H).

1. Select [:RAW image processing] ().
2. Select an option.

- You can select multiple images to process at once.

Select images

Turn the < > dial to select images to process, then press < >. - Press the < > button.

Select range

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. • To process other images, repeat this step.
• Press the <button.

3. Set the desired processing conditions.

Use shot settings

Images are processed using image settings at the time of capture. Images captured with [HDR-shooting (PQ)] set to [HDR PQ] are processed to create HEIFs, and images captured with this function set to [Disable] are processed to create JPEGs.

Set up processing→JPEG/Set up processing→HEIF

• Use < > to select an item. Turn the < > or < > dial to switch the setting.
• Press < > to access the function setting screen.
• To return to the image settings at the time of shooting, press the < > button.

Comparison screen

• You can switch between the [After change] and [Shot settings] screens by pressing the < > button and turning the < > dial.
• Items in orange on the [After change] screen have been modified since the time of capture.
• Press the < > button to return to the processing conditions screen.

4. Save.

• When using [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing→HEIF], select [Save].
• Read the message and select [OK].
• If there are other images for processing, select [Yes].

5. Select the image to display.

• Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
• Your selected image is displayed.

You can magnify images displayed for [Set up processing→JPEG] or [Set up processing →HEIF] by pressing the button. The magnification ratio varies depending on the [Image quality] setting. With <you can scroll around the magnified image.

To cancel the magnified view, press the < > button again.

Caution

Results of processing under the following settings are only applied in magnified view. Results are not applied in normal display.

• [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] - [Neural network Noise Reduction] set to [Enable]

JPEG or HEIF images at the specified aspect ratio are created when you process RAW images shot with [☐: ☐Cropping/aspect ratio] (☑) set to [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].

- ● ± 0 : Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.

- AWE: White balance ( )

You can select the white balance. Selecting [A]ables you to select [Auto:

Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [K], you can set the color temperature.

Picture Style ( )

You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast, and other parameters.

* [F, F,A][ ], and [ ] are not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.

- ± 0 : Clarity ( )

You can adjust clarity in a range of -4 to +4.

* Not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.

- Auto Lighting Optimizer (

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.

Adj face lighting

With automatic, optimal adjustment of lighting on faces, you can effectively correct images captured with oblique lighting or illuminated by flash.

* Adjustment of face lighting is not available when [Set up processing→HEIF] is set.

Caution

When adjustment of face lighting is set

Suitable adjustment may not be possible in some shooting situations unless faces can be detected in detail and are not too dark. - Noise may increase. - Adjustment may be less effective at high ISO speeds.

NR_a1 : High ISO speed NR (m)

You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (💡)

NR_OFF⁺ : Neural network Noise Reduction

You can obtain clearer images with less noise through noise reduction processing that applies deep learning.

Caution

- Processing with Neural network Noise Reduction may take some time.

• L: Image quality ( )

You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG or HEIF image.

- sRGB: Color space ( )

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set.

* [HRS] is delayed when [Set up processing→ selection.

HEIF] is set but is not an option for

• Lens aberration correction

☐OFF: Peripheral illumination correction (☐)

A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (which and check the four corners. Less correction is applied than for maximum correction with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, which is applied) If the effects of correction are not apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination correction.

OFF: Distortion correction (√)

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.

Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the sharpness with the Picture Style's sharpness parameter setting as necessary.

OFF: Digital Lens Optimizer ( )

Correct lens aberration, diffraction, and low-pass filter-induced loss of resolution by applying optical design values. To check the effect of setting this option to [High] or [Standard], use magnified view (Without magnification, the effect when Digital Lens Optimizer is set to [High] is not applied. Selecting [High] or [Standard] processes images as if both chromatic aberration and diffraction were set to [Enable], although these options are not displayed.

OFF: Chromatic aberration correction (J)

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject's outline) due to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (☐)

OFF: Diffraction correction ( )

The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (f)

Caution

• Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).
• If you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be intensified with the effects of adjustment.
• When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction.
• When [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, image edges may be emphasized, under some shooting conditions. Adjust sharpness of the Picture Style as needed.
• Processing with [Digital Lens Optimizer] set to [High] may take some time.

Note

Effects of lens aberration correction vary by lens and shooting conditions. Also, the effect may be difficult to discern depending on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc. - RAW movies cannot be processed. Process them with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).

Converting Individual Images / Specifying the Range of Images to Convert

This deep-learning processing can double the vertical and horizontal pixel counts and quadruple the total pixel count of your JPEG or HEIF images. Upscaling is available for images captured as JPEGs or HEIFs with an image size of L.

Caution

• Image processing may take some time. ● Shooting is not possible until processing is finished. These images cannot be upscaled.
• Images captured with [ ] [ ] set to an option other than [Full-frame]
• RAW images
• Images from cameras other than an EOS R5 Mark II • Images already upscaled
• Images processed on a camera or in editing software (resized, cropped, or extracted)

The effect may not look as expected for images from some shooting situations.

Note

• Upscaled images are labeled [止]
• Upscaled images are saved in the same format (JPEG or HEIF) as the original image.
• Select [In-Camera Upscaling] ().
• Select [Select images].

1. Select an image.

Turn the < > dial to select an image to upscale, then press < >.

To select another image to upscale, repeat step 3.

- Press the < ▶ button to execute upscaling.

4. Save.

• Select [OK] to save the upscaled image. If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].

5. Select the image to display.

• Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
• Your selected image is displayed.

1. Select [Select range].

2. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. To select other images, repeat step 2.

3. Press the < > button.

4. Save.

• Select [OK] to save the upscaled image.
• If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].

5. Select the image to display.

• Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
• Your selected image is displayed.

You can resize a JPEG or HEIF image to reduce the pixel count and save it as a new image. Resizing is available for L, M, or JPEGs or HEIFs (in sizes except ), including those captured in RAW+JPEG and RAW+HEIF shooting. Images and RAW images or movies cannot be resized.

1. Select [:Resize] ().
2. Select an image.

- Turn the < > dial to select the image to resize.

1. Select the desired image size.

Press < to display the image sizes.

Select the desired image size (1).

4. Save.

• Select [OK] to save the resized image.
• Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK]. To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4.

You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping is available for JPEG or HEIF images. RAW images and frame-grab images from 4K or 8K movies cannot be cropped.

1. Select [:Cropping] ().
2. Select an image.

Turn the < > dial to select the image to crop.

Press < > to display the cropping frame.

3. Set the cropping frame.

The image area within the cropping frame will be cropped.

• Resizing the cropping frame size

Turn the < > dial to resize the cropping frame size. The smaller the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.

- Correcting tilt

You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < > . While checking tilt relative to the grid, turn the < > dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right arrow (in 0.5° increments) in the upper left of the screen to correct tilt. After completing the tilt correction, press < > .

● Changing the cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation

Turn the < > dial and select [ ]. Each press of < > changes the cropping frame aspect ratio and orientation.

- Moving the cropping frame

Use < > to move the cropping frame vertically or horizontally.

4. Check the image area to be cropped.

- Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. The image area to crop is displayed.

5. Save.

Turn the < > dial to select [ ], then press < >. - Select [OK] to save the cropped image. - To upscale images that will be cropped, so that they will be saved at a higher resolution, press the < > button, then set [ ] to [Enable] (☑).

• The current [ ] setting (enable/disable) is retained even after cropping, when you select other images. To change the setting, press the button again.
• The resulting image size after upscaling is shown to the right of [C]. • Image processing may take some time.
• Shooting is not possible until processing is finished.

- Check the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK].

To crop another image, repeat steps 2 to 5.

Caution

The position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the angle set for tilt correction. Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized. - AF point display information ( ) and Dust Delete Data ( ) will not be appended to the cropped images. ● Available aspect ratios vary depending on whether you use [☐Cropping] or [☐Add cropping information].

√ Converting Individual Images √ Specifying the Range of Images to Convert

You can convert HEIF images captured in HDR shooting and save them as JPEG images.

Caution

Some scenes may look different after conversion if the original and converted images are compared. - Conversion is not available for upscaled or cropped images, or for frame-grab images from 4K or 8K movies.

Note

- HEIF images that have been converted to JPEGs are labeled [JPEG↓]

Converting Individual Images

1. Select [:→EIF→JPEG conversion] ().
2. Select [Select images].

3. Select an image.

• Turn the < > dial to select an HEIF image to convert to JPEG, then press < >. To select another image to convert, repeat step 3.
• Press the < > button to convert to JPEG.

4. Save.

• Select [OK] to save the JPEG image. If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].

5. Select the image to display.

• Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
• Your selected image is displayed.

1. Select [Select range].

2. Specify the range of images.

• Select the first image (start point).
• Next, select the last image (end point). A checkmark [] will be appended to all the images within the range between first and last images. To select another image to convert, repeat step 2.

3. Press the < > button.

4. Save.

• Select [OK] to save the JPEG image.
• If there are other images for conversion, select [Yes].

5. Select the image to display.

• Select [Original image] or [Processed img.].
• Your selected image is displayed.

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

1. Specify the images to be played back.

To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2.

To choose images for the slide show, filter the images with [:Set image search conditions] (j)

2. Select [:Slide show] ().

3. Set the playback as desired.

Select [Set up].

Display time

Repeat

• Set the [Display time] and [Repeat] (repeated playback) settings for the still photos. After completing the settings, press the < > button.

4. Start the slide show.

Select [Start]. After [Loading image...] is displayed, the slide show will start. All movies are played first, followed by all still photos.

5. Exit the slide show.

- To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the < > button.

Note

To pause the slide show, press < >. During pause, [ ] will be displayed in the upper left of the screen. Press < > again to resume the slide show. During the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the < > button to switch the display format (☑). During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the < > dial. During auto playback or when playback is paused, you can turn the < > dial to view another image. During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect. The display time may differ depending on the image.

You can check a simulated display on the camera screen of how VR content captured with lenses in the EOS VR System will appear on VR display devices.

Note

For details on recording VR content, refer to the VR Recording Guide.

1. Select [:VR preview] ().
2. Choose a VR image.
3. Check the simulated VR display.

• To switch between left and right viewpoints of the VR content, press < > straight in. To move the viewpoint, press < > in other directions.
• To center the viewpoint again, press and hold the < > button and press < > straight in. To magnify/reduce images, turn the < > dial.

Movie playback controls

Item Playback Operations
◀ Skip backward Skips backward	d approx. 1 sec. each time you press < > left. ○
◀| | Previous frame	Displays the previous frame each time you turn the < > dial left while holding down the < > button.
▶ Play Pressing < > toggles between	play and stop.
||► Next frame	Displays the next frame each time you turn the < > dial right while holding down the < RATE > button.
▶ Skip forward Skips forward approx.	1 sec. each time you press < > right. ○

Clearing the Search Conditions

You can filter image display according to your search conditions. After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. You can also protect, rate, play a slide show, erase, and apply other operations to filtered images.

1. Select [:Set image search conditions] ().
2. Set the search conditions.

• Turn the < > dial to select an option. Turn the < > dial to set the option. A checkmark [√] is appended to the left of the option. (Specified as the search condition.)
• If you select the option and press the < button, the checkmark [√] will be removed (which cancels the search condition). After completing the settings, press < >.

Option Description
Rating	Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.
Date	Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.
Folder	Displays images in the selected folder.
Protect	Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.
Type of file (1)	Displays images of the selected file type.
Type of file (2)

3. Apply the search conditions.

- Read the message displayed, then select [OK]. The search condition is applied.

4. Display the found images.

- Press the < > button.

Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played back.

When the images are filtered for display, the screen will have an outer yellow frame (2).

Caution

• If no images match the search conditions, < cannot be pressed in step 2. For movies, searches apply to files in the XFVC or CRM folder. Searching does not apply to movie files in the DCIM folder.

Note

• Search conditions may be cleared after operations involving camera power or card changes and editing, adding, or erasing images.
• Auto power off time may be extended while the [:Set image search conditions] screen is displayed.

Clearing the Search Conditions

Access the screen in step 2, then press the < ➞ button to clear all the search conditions.

1. Select [:View from last seen] ().
2. Select an option.

● [Enable]: Playback resumes from the last image displayed (unless you have just finished shooting).

● [Disable]: Playback resumes from your most recent shot whenever the camera is restarted.

Configuring Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection Playback Applying Blur/Out-of-Focus Image Detection

This feature can automatically determine how blurry or out-of-focus images are, based mainly on faces in JPEG/HEIF images of people. By setting a level of blurriness or lack of focus, you can sort, protect, or rate all images at that level.

(1) Much blurring/lack of focus, : Little blurring/lack of focus (2) Frame indicating blur/out-of-focus detection

• When shooting, set the JPEG/HEIF image size to L or if you will use this feature.
• You can check this image evaluation during playback on the basic information display or shooting information display screen. In index display, the (1) icon remains in the upper left of the playback screen regardless of the current image.

Caution

Blur/out-of-focus detection is not performed for images captured under these conditions.

• RAW images, or JPEG/HEIF images from RAW processing
• Without using the electronic shutter
• Using manual focus • [ :Subject to detect]: [None]
• Focus bracketing
• Multiple exposures
• Set to expanded ISO speed (H) • Using lenses compatible with the EOS VR System • [ dual shooting (still&movie)] still photo shooting

No icons or detection frames indicating the amount of blurring are shown in playback of images captured in RAW+JPEG or RAW+HEIF shooting, because RAW images are used for this playback. To check icons or detection frames indicating the amount of blurring when [Rec options] in [: Record func +card/folder sel.] is set to [Rec. separately], select the card containing the JPEGs or HEIFs in [Play].

- Blur/out-of-focus detection results are not applied to images saved by using these functions.

• Resizing
• Cropping
• In-camera upscaling • HEIF→JPEG conversion

- The following situations may prevent blur/out-of-focus detection or make the results inaccurate.

• Faces are covered by objects such as helmets, sunglasses, or fashion accessories
• Faces are partially hidden behind netting or water droplets
• Subjects are not directly facing the camera
• Faces are very small or large relative to the screen
• Faces are at the edge of the screen
• Faces are too dark or bright • Several faces are close to each other • A person shown is not recognized as the main subject
• Shooting at high ISO speeds
• Shooting people shown in photo prints or displayed on a screen

- Blur/out-of-focus detection may be applied to non-human subjects, people who are not the main subject, or body parts other than faces. This is more likely to happen after any significant changes in the main subject's posture.

Note

In DPP, you can sort and filter images based on the camera's blur/out-of-focus detection results.

1. Select [Blur/Out-of-Focus image detection] ().
2. Set the blur/out-of-focus detection items.

Icon display

Show detect. frame

Detection level

Levels of blur/out-of-focus detection are based on these criteria.

Standard:

[.] (little blurring/lack of focus) is displayed for images that are fairly clear and in focus when viewed with the naked eye at actual size.

High:

[.] (little blurring/lack of focus) is displayed for images that are clearer and more in focus than [Standard].

Low:

[.] (little blurring/lack of focus) is also displayed for images that are less clear and in focus than [Standard], excluding images that are greatly blurred or out of focus.

After completing the settings, press the < P button.

Caution

• Image evaluation by the camera may not match a subjective impression with the naked eye. This discrepancy may be greater when the level is set to [High]. Ultimately, images should be evaluated visually to decide.
• Consider changing the detection level if image evaluation by the camera does not match your impression of images.

You can configure playback so that turning the < > dial displays images determined to be only a little blurry or out of focus.

Quick Control

- Press the button and set [Image jump w/ ] to [Display image with less blur/Out-of-Focus].

Using < to set

- Press < horizontally to set to [Display img with less blur].

Note

- You can also use the < > dial to configure image display in [: Image jump w/ ]

Histogram

You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during image playback.

1. Select [:Playback information display] ().
2. Add a checkmark [√] next to the number of screens to display.

• Select numbers with the < > dial.
• Press < to clear a checkmark []. Press it again to add a checkmark [√]
• Repeat these steps to add a checkmark [] to the number of each screen to display, then select [OK].
• Your selected information can be accessed by pressing the < INFO button during playback, or by using < *when shooting information is displayed.

The histograms show signal levels across the tonal range. Brightness display (for checking the general exposure level and overall gradation) and RGB display (for checking saturation and gradation of red, green, and blue) are available. You can switch the histogram displayed by pressing the < button when [] is dig-eyed in the lower left of the [: Playback information display] screen.

• [Brightness] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level, with the horizontal axis indicating the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image, and the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left, detail in shadows will be lost, and if there are too many pixels on the right, detail in highlights will be lost. The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation.

Sample histograms

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

• [RGB] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary color's brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue), with the horizontal axis indicating the color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right) and the vertical axis indicating the pixel count at each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color, and the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the corresponding color information will be lacking, and if there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated, without gradation. By checking the image's RGB histogram, you can see the color's saturation and gradation conditions, as well as the white balance bias.

Displaying the Highlight Alert

You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback screen. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.

1. Select [: Highlight alert] ().
2. Select [Enable].

You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined in red on the playback screen.

1. Select [:AF point disp.] ().
2. Select [Enable].

You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on the playback screen. This function is convenient for checking the image's vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.

1. Select [:Playback grid] ().
2. Select an option.

You can select how time is displayed on the movie playback screen.

1. Select [:Movie play count] ().
2. Select an option.

Rec time

Displays the recording or playback time during movie playback.

Time code

Displays the time code during movie playback.

Note

Time codes are always recorded to movie files (except when High Frame Rate movies are set to [Free run]), regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting. The [Movie play count] setting in [Time code] is linked to the [Movie play count], so that these settings always match. The "frame" count is not displayed during movie recording or playback.

This chapter describes how to connect the camera to a smartphone or computer, send images, and control the camera remotely.

Caution

Important

Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by erroneous network settings when using the camera. In addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused by use of the camera.

Take security measures that you deem necessary when using a network, at your discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage caused by unauthorized access or other security breaches.

• Tab Menus: Communication Functions

• Available Network Features

• Preparing to Use Communication Functions

• Network-Specific Preparation

• Transferring Images to an FTP Server

- Connecting to EOS Utility

- Uploading Images to image.canon

- Syncing Time Between Cameras

- Connecting to a Smartphone or Tablet

• Live Streaming

- Connecting to a Wireless Remote Control

• Using Camera Control API (CCAPI)

• GPS Device Settings

- Linked Shooting

• Basic Communication Settings

- Checking and Editing Network Settings

- Airplane Mode

- Bluetooth Settings

- Renaming the Camera

- Reference

- Error Details

- Responding to Error Messages

- Troubleshooting Guide

- Wireless Communication Precautions

- Security